JP5959197B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery, and first, a bet number is determined by a player's BET operation. The reels start to rotate when the start operation is performed with the set number of bets set, and the rotation is stopped by operating a stop button provided corresponding to each reel. When all reels stop rotating, a winning combination is generated when a predetermined winning symbol combination (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter referred to as a symbol combination) is arranged on the winning line. To do. That is, the game is advanced by the player's operation.

  These winning combinations include special roles with a transition to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, small roles with the addition of gaming values such as medals, and replays that can be played without using gaming values. There is a re-playing role accompanied by a game. In general, these winning combinations can be won on the condition that an internal lottery performed simultaneously with the start operation is won.

  In addition, in this type of slot machine, in addition to the special game state associated with the winning of the special role, it becomes advantageous to the player by having a high probability of winning the re-gamer in the general game state of the special game state. Some have been proposed for controlling to an advantageous gaming state such as a replay time.

  Further, in the slot machine controlled to the advantageous gaming state in this way, a signal indicating that the advantageous gaming state is controlled with the start of the advantageous gaming state (specific general game) is used as an external output signal as a hall computer. It has been proposed that the number of times that the external machine is controlled to the advantageous gaming state in the slot machine can be managed by outputting to an external device such as an information display or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1) ).

JP 2010-172388 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when outputting an external output signal indicating that the game state is controlled to the advantageous game state with the start of the advantageous game state, a predetermined time ( In order to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that other external output signals received by the external device during this period are specified as external output signals that are not in the advantageous gaming state, The progress of the game is stopped until the output of the external output signal indicating that it is controlled is stopped. Therefore, there is a problem that the progress of the game is hindered over a predetermined time for outputting the external output signal.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and can determine whether an external device is an external output signal in a specific gaming state without hindering the progress of the game. The purpose is to provide.

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
Game progress control means for performing control to advance the game when a progress operation is performed in a state in which the game can proceed;
Game state control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of game states in accordance with the result of the game;
External output control means for performing control to externally output signals related to the game;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the derivation of the display result with the addition of game value,
The external output control means includes
A specific gaming state signal output means for outputting a specific gaming state signal corresponding to the specific gaming state on the condition of control of the specific gaming state among the plurality of gaming states;
Game-related signal output means for outputting a game-related signal when the giving display result is derived,
The specific gaming state signal output means is controlled to the specific gaming state and starts outputting the specific gaming state signal. When the given display result is not derived in a predetermined game started thereafter, the specific gaming state signal is output. The output of the specific gaming state signal is continued until the output of the game-related signal is completed when the giving display result is derived in the predetermined game, and the process ends. Slot machine.
In addition, you may provide the following structures.
(1) A variable display device capable of starting a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value and variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device. Because
Progress operation (operation of start switch 7, operation of stop switches 8L to 8R) in a state in which the game can proceed (a state where a predetermined number of bets are set, or one of reels 2L to 2R is rotating) Game progress control means (main control unit 41, FIG. 22) for performing control to advance the game when
A game state control means (a process for shifting the game state by the main control unit 41) for controlling to any one of a plurality of game states;
External output control means (main control unit 41, FIG. 23) for performing control to externally output a signal related to the game (external output signal),
The external output control means includes
Specific game state signal output means (Sk101 in FIG. 23) for outputting a specific game state signal (RT2 signal) corresponding to the specific game state on condition of control of the specific game state (normal / RT2) among the plurality of game states. ~ Sk113),
Game-related signal output means (Sk114 to Sk119 in FIG. 23) for outputting a game-related signal (medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, etc.) indicating the progress of the game in accordance with the control for progressing the game,
The specific game state signal output means is included in a game-related signal output period in which the game-related signal can be output after the next game is newly started after the output of the specific game state signal is started. The specific game state signal is output until reaching a specific timing (at the end of game control of the next game (when all reels are stopped or when the medal OUT signal is output), or when the medal IN signal of the next game is output). (See Sk107 to Sk113 in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 24 to 28).

  According to such a configuration, since the output of the specific gaming state signal is continued until a specific timing that is not included in the game-related signal output period after the next game is newly started, The time required for the device to receive the specific gaming state signal can be ensured without hindering the progress of the game, and the specific gaming state signal is not transmitted (output terminated) during the output of the game related signal. Therefore, it is possible to easily specify whether or not the game-related signal received on the external device side is in a specific gaming state.

  Note that the plurality of game states correspond to, for example, game states having different probabilities of occurrence of specific winnings, game states having different target winnings, and the like.

  Further, the specific gaming state may be a gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared to other gaming states, or may be a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player as compared to other gaming states. .

  In addition, “outputting a specific game state signal corresponding to the specific game state on the condition that the specific game state is controlled among the plurality of game states” means that the specific game is not controlled before being actually controlled to the specific game state. A state signal may be output, or a specific game state signal may be output after being controlled to a specific game state.

  In addition, the game-related signal may be a signal that is output as the game progresses, and may be a signal that directly indicates the progress of the game, such as a signal that indicates the start or end of the game. When a signal indicating information other than (such as a signal indicating a gaming value used for setting the number of bets) is necessarily output as the game progresses, such a signal may be used as a game-related signal. .

  The game-related signal output period during which the game-related signal can be output is a predetermined period from when the progress operation is performed until the output of the game-related signal is completed (for example, after the start switch 7 is operated, During the period until the output of the medal IN signal for several minutes is completed, when all the reels stop and no medal payout occurs after the final stop operation is performed among the operations of the stop switches 8L to 8R, all the reels This is a period up to the time of stoppage, which is a period until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed when all the reels stop and the medal payout occurs, and is determined in advance depending on the progress operation or the type of the game related signal. It may be a predetermined period, or may be a fixed period regardless of the progress operation or the type of game-related signal.

(2) In the slot machine of (1), the gaming state control means controls to the specific gaming state on condition that a specific display result (special replay) is derived (FIG. 11),
The specific gaming state signal output means outputs the specific gaming state signal when the specific display result is derived and controlled to the specific gaming state (to set an RT2 signal output command by special replay winning) Processing).

  According to such a configuration, the specific gaming state signal can be output when the control trigger to the specific gaming state is established, so that the control timing to the specific gaming state can be appropriately specified on the external device side. Can do.

  In the case where the gaming state control unit controls the specific gaming state when the specific display result is derived in a predetermined gaming state (normal / RT0), the specific gaming state signal output unit When the display result is derived in the predetermined gaming state, the specific gaming state signal may be output. Even when the specific game state signal is output only when the specific display result is derived in the state controlled to the predetermined game state, it can be determined by the predetermining means (for example, internal lottery) according to the game state. The degree of freedom when designing the determination result (for example, the type of the lottery target role) can be expanded.

  Note that “output when the specific display result is derived and controlled to the specific gaming state” means, for example, when the control to the specific gaming state is started at the same time as the specific display result is derived Is output when the specific display result is derived, and there is a slight difference between the timing at which the specific display result is derived and the timing at which the control to the specific gaming state is started (for example, one Output when the specific display result is derived in the case where it is determined that the specific display result is derived in the interruption process of (and the control to the specific gaming state is started in the next interruption process) However, it may be output when the control to the specific gaming state is started.

  (3) In the slot machine of (1), the specific game state signal output means is configured to output a predetermined number of games after the control to the specific game state (normally when there is no AT / expected value of the number of games for which RT2 is ended) The specific game state signal is output when the control to the specific game state is still maintained after digestion.

  According to such a configuration, the specific game state signal can be output at an appropriate timing after the predetermined number of games have been consumed after being controlled to the specific game state.

  It is to be noted that an advantageous period control means for controlling an advantageous period (AT) advantageous for the player is provided, and the gaming state control means is provided when a predetermined ending condition is established in the specific gaming state (when the transition start is stopped). The control to the specific gaming state is terminated, and the advantageous period control means is such that the termination condition is less likely to be established when the specific gaming state is the advantageous period than when the advantageous period is not. The predetermined number of games is set to a number greater than the expected number of games required for the termination condition to be satisfied when it is not the advantageous period. May be. In this case, on the external device side, it is possible to specify from the specific game state signal that the player is in the specific game state and is likely to be controlled during the advantageous period.

  (4) In the slot machine of any one of (1) to (3), the specific timing is a timing at which a next game newly started after the output of the specific gaming state signal is ended.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the period until the next game is finished as a period for outputting the specific gaming state signal.

  Note that the timing at which the game ends is, for example, the timing at which the display result is derived on the variable display device in a game to which no gaming value is given, and the gaming value of the game in which a gaming value is given. This is the timing when the grant is completed.

  The specific timing may be the timing at which the next game is actually ended, or the timing at which a slight deviation from the timing at which the next game is actually ended (for example, the next game in one interrupt process). It may be determined that the game has actually ended, and it is determined that the specific timing has been reached in the next interrupt process).

(5) In the slot machine of (1), effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on control information (command) transmitted from the game progress control means;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result from the variable display device,
The game progress control means includes:
Pre-decision means (internal lottery) for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation control for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result (internal lottery result) of the pre-determination unit and an operation mode (stop operation timing, stop order, etc.) of the derivation operation unit. Means,
The derivation control means has a first operation when the derivation operation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode when the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined result (replay GRs 41 to 44 in the modification). It is advantageous when the first predetermined display result is derived when control for deriving a predetermined display result (lower replay) is performed and the deriving operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode. Control to derive the second predetermined display result (normal replay) that does not change the degree,
The external output control means outputs the specific game state signal when the first predetermined display result (lower replay) is derived in the specific game state (normal / RT2),
The production control means includes
Whether or not to derive the first predetermined display result (lower replay) accompanied by the output of the specific gaming state signal when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44). Derivation determination means for determining
When the derivation determining means determines that the first predetermined display result is to be derived, an operation mode for deriving the first predetermined display result (lower replay) is recognizable, and the first predetermined display result is recognizable. A predetermined operation mode notification means (special navigation effect) for recognizing an operation mode for deriving the second predetermined display result (normal replay) when it is determined that the display result is not derived (modified example) 2) (a)).

  According to such a configuration, the external output control means outputs the specific gaming state signal when the first predetermined display result is derived, and the determination result of the prior determination means is the first predetermined display result. When the predetermined result that can be derived is obtained, the second predetermined display result that has the same degree of advantage as when the first predetermined display result or the first predetermined display result is derived according to the operation mode of the derivation operation means. When the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result and the specific gaming state signal is output, the effect control means outputs the first predetermined display. When the operation mode for deriving the result is notified and the specific gaming state signal is not output, the notification mode for deriving the second predetermined display result is notified, and the derivation operation in the operation mode notified to the player Prompt operation of means Thus, even if the control state of the game progress control means is the same, it is possible to control whether or not the specific game state signal is output by the effect control means. Therefore, the specific game state output from the external output control means Even if the control state of the game progress control means is the same, the external device can be recognized as a different situation by the signal.

  The operation mode of the derivation operation means corresponds to the timing at which the derivation operation means is operated, the operation order when there are a plurality of derivation operation means, and the like.

  Further, the predetermined operation mode notifying means is not limited to notifying the operation mode itself, as long as the operation mode is identifiable, and the operation is performed by the effect suggesting the operation mode or the effect implying the operation mode. It is also possible to notify the mode.

  Further, the derivation determining means, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result, the first game accompanying the output of the specific gaming state signal according to the control state controlled by the effect control means It may be determined whether or not a predetermined display result is derived, or the first game state signal accompanied by the output of the specific game state signal according to the history of the control state of the game progress control means or the history of the control state of the effect control means. It may be determined whether or not to derive the predetermined display result.

  (5-1) In the slot machine of (5), the effect control means includes an advantageous period control means for controlling an advantageous period (AT) advantageous for a player, and the derivation determination means has one advantageous period ( Even in the case where the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44) more than once in a series of ATs), the specific gaming state signal of only one time in the one advantageous period It may be determined whether or not the first predetermined display result (lower replay) is derived so that the first predetermined display result with output is derived (in (2) of the modified example (2)). a)).

  In this case, after the start of the advantageous period, the first predetermined display result can be derived and the specific gaming state signal can be output only once until the end condition of the advantageous period is satisfied. Even if the control state does not change and the effect control means controls the advantageous period, the game progress control means can output the specific gaming state signal only once per advantageous period, and the external output signal The number of times controlled during the advantageous period can be recognized by the external device that has received the.

  Even if the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44) two or more times in one advantageous period, the derivation determining means is 1 in the one advantageous period. It is determined whether or not to cause the first predetermined display result (lower replay) to be derived so that the first predetermined display result with the output of the specific gaming state signal (lower replay signal) is derived only once. As a method, for example, after the start of one advantageous period, when the first predetermined display result has not yet been derived in the one advantageous period, the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined result ( When it is determined that the first predetermined display result (lower replay) is derived when the replay GR 41 to 44) is reached, and the first predetermined display result has already been derived in the one advantageous period. Is When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44), it may be determined that the second predetermined display result (normal replay) is derived, After the start, when the predetermined operation mode notifying unit has not yet notified the operation mode for deriving the first predetermined display result in the one advantageous period, the determination result of the prior determination unit is the predetermined result. (Replay GR41 to 44), it is determined that the first predetermined display result (lower replay) is to be derived, and the predetermined operation mode notifying unit has already already performed the first predetermined display result in the one advantageous period. When the operation mode for deriving the display result is informed, the second predetermined display result is displayed when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44). It is sufficient to determine that is derived (usually replay).

  (5-2) In the slot machine of (5) or (5-1), the effect control means includes an advantageous period control means for controlling an advantageous period (AT) advantageous for a player, and the derivation determining means is When the first predetermined display result has not yet been derived in the one advantageous period after the start of the one advantageous period, the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44). If it is determined that the first predetermined display result (lower replay) is to be derived and the first predetermined display result has already been derived during the one advantageous period, When the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44), it may be configured to determine that the second predetermined display result (normal replay) is derived (modified example (2) (A) Reference).

  In this case, after the start of the advantageous period, the first predetermined display result can be derived and the specific gaming state signal can be output only once until the end condition of the advantageous period is satisfied. Even if the control state does not change and the effect control means controls the advantageous period, the game progress control means can output the specific gaming state signal only once per advantageous period, and the external output signal The number of times controlled during the advantageous period can be recognized by the external device that has received the.

  (5-3) In the slot machine of any one of (5), (5-1), and (5-2), the effect control means controls an advantageous period (AT) that is advantageous for the player. The derivation determining means includes a control means, and when the end condition of the one advantageous period is satisfied after the start of one advantageous period, and the control is continued to another advantageous period after the end condition is satisfied. In the case where the first predetermined display result has not yet been derived in the other advantageous period, the first determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result (replay GR41 to 44). If it is determined that one predetermined display result (lower replay) is to be derived and the first predetermined display result has already been derived in the other advantageous period, the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined Result (Replay GR41-44) If it becomes the second predetermined display result (see (a) Modification (2)) (Normal replay) may be configured to determine that to derive.

  In this case, after the start of another advantageous period after the end of one advantageous period, the first predetermined display result is derived only once until the termination condition of the other advantageous period is satisfied, and the specific gaming state signal is Therefore, even if the control state of the game progress control means does not change and is continuously controlled by the effect control means for a plurality of advantageous periods, one per advantageous period from the game progress control means. The specific gaming state signal can be output only once, and the external device that has received the external output signal can recognize the number of times controlled in the advantageous period.

  The advantageous period end condition is that the number of games controlled during the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number of games (the number of AT games), the total number of gaming values given during the advantageous period (medal awarded) The total number of gaming values granted during the advantageous period (total number of medals awarded) minus the total number of gaming values used during the advantageous period (total number of medals consumed) As the (net increase number) reaches a predetermined value, the number of times (the number of winning of a predetermined role) that has been determined in advance by the prior determination means during the advantageous period, or the display result of the variable display device For example, the number of times that a specific display result has been derived (the number of stoppages for a predetermined number) reaches a predetermined value.

  (5-4) In the slot machine of any one of (5), (5-1) to (5-3), the pre-determining means performs the predetermined result only in the specific gaming state (normal / RT2). You may comprise so that replay GR41-44) can be determined (refer (a) of modification (2)).

  In this case, the game progress control means uniformly outputs the specific game state signal when the first predetermined display result is derived without determining whether or not the current game state is the specific game state. By performing the control, the specific gaming state signal can be output only when the state is controlled to the specific gaming state and the first predetermined display result is derived.

  (5-5) In the slot machine of any one of (5), (5-1) to (5-4), the external output control means derives the first predetermined display result (lower replay). Sometimes, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (normal RT2), and the specific gaming state signal (on the condition that it is determined that the specific gaming state (normal RT2) is determined). It may be configured to perform control to output (lower replay signal) (see (a) of modification (2)).

  In this case, even when the specific gaming state signal is output only when the first predetermined display result is derived in the state controlled to the specific gaming state, it is determined by the predetermining means according to the gaming state. The degree of freedom in designing possible decision results can be expanded.

(6) In the slot machine of (1), effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on control information (command) transmitted from the game progress control means;
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the display result from the variable display device,
The game progress control means includes:
Pre-decision means (internal lottery) for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation control for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result (internal lottery result) of the pre-determination unit and an operation mode (stop operation timing, stop order, etc.) of the derivation operation unit. Means,
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is a first determination result (for example, a winning flag indicating normal replay), an operation mode determination unit that determines one of a plurality of types of operation modes of the derivation operation unit;
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, while giving the same value (for example, normal replay winning) regardless of whether the derivation operation means is operated by the correct answer operation or not , If the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result (for example, push order bell, push order promotion replay, push order maintenance replay, push order entry replay), the derivation Value giving means for giving different values (for example, different medal payout numbers and transitions to different gaming states) according to the operation mode of the operating means (for example, correct answer push order or incorrect answer push order);
Determination result information transmitting means for transmitting determination result information (for example, internal winning command) that can specify the determination result of the prior determination means and the determination result of the operation mode determination means to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Decision result information receiving means for receiving the decision result information transmitted from the decision result information transmitting means;
Advantageous period control means for controlling the advantageous period (eg, AT) advantageous to the player;
An operation mode notifying unit for notifying information capable of specifying the operation mode of the derivation operation unit,
The operation mode notification means includes:
In the case where the advantageous period is controlled by the advantageous period control means, when the determination result information receiving means receives the determination result information indicating the second determination result, an advantageous value is given by the value assigning means. Information that can specify the operation mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) is notified (for example, control of the sub-control unit 91 that executes the navigation effect of the correct answer pressing order),
When the determination result information receiving unit receives the determination result information indicating the first determination result, the number of consecutive correct operation (for example, the value of the correct counter) can be a predetermined number (for example, 3 times). When it is determined that the specific gaming state signal is output externally (for example, at the time of first hit AT), the operation mode (for example, the correct internal push order) specified from the determination result information is specified. While notifying possible information, when it is determined that the number of consecutive correct operation may be a predetermined number and that the specific gaming state signal is not output externally (for example, at AT after interruption), Notifying information that can specify an operation mode different from the specified operation mode,
In the specific game state, the specific game state signal output means performs a predetermined number of consecutive (for example, three) correct operations for operating the derivation operation means in the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination unit. In this case, the specific gaming state signal is output (see (b) of the modified example (2)).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control unit determines whether or not it is necessary to externally output the number of consecutive correct operations for operating the derivation operation unit in the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination unit and the specific gaming state signal. In response, it is possible to determine whether or not to notify the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination means. Then, in order to notify the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination unit when the effect control unit determines that the specific game state signal needs to be output to the outside, the game progress control unit performs the correct operation continuously for a predetermined number of times. A specific game state signal can be output to the outside according to what has been done, and information indicating the control state of the effect control means can be output to the outside as needed. Here, when the information indicating the control state of the effect control means cannot be output to the outside, or when the information indicating the control state of the effect control means is output to the outside even if unnecessary, the external The slot machine information that is output to is not accurate. However, the effect control means determines whether or not to notify the operation mode determined by the operation mode determination means depending on whether or not the specific game state signal needs to be output to the outside, and the game progress control means corrects the answer. Since the specific game state signal indicating the control state of the effect control unit is output to the outside based on the number of continuous operations, information indicating the accurate control state of the effect control unit can be output to the outside. Accordingly, since the game progress control means can also output the control state of the effect control means to the outside, the signal control path for the external output can be accurately output even in the control state of the effect control means. Can be transmitted outside the slot machine.

  Note that the same value means that the same gaming value is given regardless of the operation mode of the derivation operation means, the meaning that the gaming state to be transferred is the same, or the gaming state is Includes the meaning of not migrating.

  Furthermore, when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the first determination result, the derivation control unit may display the same display result (for example, “replay / replay / replay” regardless of the operation mode of the derivation operation unit). ”) May be performed (see (b) of Modification (2)).

  In this case, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, the derivation control means performs control for deriving the same display result without being influenced by the operation mode of the derivation operation means. Can contribute.

  (7) In the slot machine of any one of (1) to (6), the specific gaming state signal output means outputs the specific gaming state signal for at least a predetermined period (2 seconds).

  According to such a configuration, the specific gaming state signal can be output for at least a predetermined period.

  The predetermined period is equal to or longer than a period required to detect the specific game state signal in the external device. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect the specific game state signal even in an external device such as an old hallcon that requires a relatively long time to detect the specific game state signal.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the predetermined period setting means (setting means) for setting the said predetermined period may be further provided. In this case, it can be arbitrarily set according to the detection time of the specific gaming state signal by the external device.

  (8) In the slot machine of (7), when the specific gaming state signal output means has reached the specific timing from the start of the output of the specific gaming state signal until the predetermined period elapses, the specific timing The output of the specific gaming state signal is continued until reaching a predetermined timing (when the medal IN signal output is completed) that is different from the specific timing and that is not included in the game related signal output period thereafter ( (See Sk110 to Sk113 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26, and FIG. 28).

  According to such a configuration, the specific game state signal can be reliably detected in the external device, and the received game-related signal is related to the game in the specific game state depending on whether the detection timing is the specific timing or the predetermined timing. It is possible to clearly specify whether or not the signal is a signal.

  (9) In the slot machine of (7), the specific timing is a timing after the predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the specific gaming state signal was started, regardless of the timing at which the advance operation was performed. .

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the predetermined period has not yet elapsed when the specific timing is reached after the output of the specific gaming state signal is started.

(10) In the slot machine of any one of (1) to (9), even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped, game data holding means (backup power supply) that holds at least a part of the game data;
When power supply to the slot machine is started, it returns to the control state before the power supply to the slot machine is stopped based on the game data held by the game data holding means (backup power supply) Control state return means (main control unit 41) for causing,
The specific game state signal output means, when the control state return means returns to the state before the elapse of a predetermined period (2 seconds) after the output of the specific game state signal (RT2 signal) is started, at least after the return The specific gaming state signal (RT2 signal) is output for a predetermined period (2 seconds) (see FIG. 27).

  According to such a feature, even after the power supply to the slot machine is started, the specific gaming state signal is output for at least a predetermined period even if the specific gaming state signal is output. Thus, the specific gaming state signal can be received.

(11) In any one of the slot machines of (1) to (10), even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped, game data holding means (backup power supply) that holds at least a part of the game data;
When power supply to the slot machine is started, it returns to the control state before the power supply to the slot machine is stopped based on the game data held by the game data holding means (backup power supply) Control state return means (main control unit 41) for causing,
The specific game state signal output means outputs the specific game state signal (RT2 signal) for a predetermined period (2 seconds) at the start of the specific game state (normal / RT2), and the control state return means outputs the specific game state signal. Even when the game state (normal / RT2) is restored, the specific game state signal (RT2 signal) is output for at least the predetermined period (two seconds) (Sa15 and Sa16 in FIG. 21).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to specify whether or not the gaming state after power interruption recovery is the specific gaming state on the external device side, and even when the specific gaming state of the previous day is restored at the time of opening the store, It is possible to make the external device recognize the specific game state as the specific game state of today.

  (12) In any one of the slot machines of (1) to (11), a specific game state end signal (RT2 signal) indicating the end of the specific game state is output at the end of the specific game state (normal / RT2). Specific game state end signal output means is provided.

According to this feature, the end time of the specific gaming state can be specified on the external device side.
The specific gaming state end signal may be any signal that can specify at least the end of the specific gaming state, and may be a signal common to the specific gaming state signal (in this case, a game other than the specific gaming state in an external device). (When the state is specified, it functions as a specific gaming state signal, and when it is received in the state where the specific gaming state is specified, it functions as a specific gaming state end signal). It may be a signal different from the specific gaming state signal (a different output signal line, or a common output signal line or a different output mode such as an output time).

It is a system configuration | structure figure which shows the structure of the game system in an Example. It is a front view of a slot machine. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of a special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the symbol combination of a transfer event, and a transfer event. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state and transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a game state and RT. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a block diagram relevant to the output of an external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the external output control process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of an external output signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the control condition of AT, and RT2 signal. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the calling lamp apparatus used for the Example. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the calling lamp apparatus in an Example. It is a figure which shows the various signals and information transmitted / received between each apparatus which comprises the game system in an Example. It is a figure which shows the latest game table in the calling lamp apparatus of an Example. It is a figure which shows the game information table in the calling lamp apparatus of an Example. It is a figure which shows the game status log | history table in the calling lamp apparatus of an Example. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the collection unit 50 in an Example, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the table | game game information data transmitted from the collection unit 50. FIG. It is a figure which shows the latest game table in the collection unit 50 of an Example. It is a figure which shows the game information table in the collection unit 50 of an Example. It is a figure which shows the game state log | history table in the collection unit 50 of an Example. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hall computer 140 used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the today game information table in the hall computer 140 of an Example. It is a figure which shows the stand-by game state history table in the hall computer 140 of an Example. It is a figure which shows the ART related setting screen in the hall computer 140 of an Example. It is a figure which shows the continuous unit related setting screen in the hall computer 140 of an Example. It is a figure which shows the setting content for every type ID which can be selected in the ART related setting screen of an Example. It is a figure which shows the setting content for every type ID which can be selected in the ART related setting screen of an Example. It is a figure which shows the setting content for every type ID which can be selected in the ART related setting screen of an Example. It is a figure which shows the setting content for every type ID which can be selected in the ART related setting screen of an Example. It is a figure which shows the setting content for every type ID which can be selected in the ART related setting screen of an Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the interruption monitoring process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the input relevant process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the latest game table update process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the payout related process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the ART determination process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the game state specific process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the 1 unit determination process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for the Example. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the display content in the calling lamp apparatus used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the game information screen 1 classified by table displayed in the hall computer used for the Example. It is a figure which shows the stand-by game state screen displayed in the hall computer used for the Example.

EMBODIMENT OF THE INVENTION The form for implementing the information display apparatus which concerns on this invention is demonstrated below based on an Example.
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a gaming system according to the present embodiment to which the present invention is applied.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of slot machines 1 arranged in parallel on a plurality of gaming islands arranged in a game hall, and one-to-one with respect to the slot machines 1. Correspondingly installed call lamp device 200, a collection unit 50 for collecting game information of each slot machine 1, and a relay unit for relaying game information data based on each game information collected by the collection unit 50 to the hall computer 140 60 and game information data including game information of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall relayed by each relay unit 60, and each slot machine 1 included in the received game information data A hall computer 140 for managing game information and the like.

  In the gaming island of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of slot machines 1 and a medal lending machine 102 for lending medals that are game media for playing games in the slot machine 1 are provided on the side surface. The calling lamp device 200 is provided in the upper position of the corresponding slot machine 1, and the calling lamp device 200 used in the present embodiment is provided with a normal lamp lighting function, By having a display unit on the front surface, it has a display function for various game information and messages.

  Further, the slot machine 1 and the collection unit 50 of this embodiment are connected via a signal cable 59 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 33, and each collection unit 50 is further connected to a relay unit via a communication cable 61. 60. The collecting unit 50 and the relay unit 60 are capable of bidirectional data communication through a simple local area network, and various signals to be described later that are output from each slot machine 1 by the collecting unit 50. The game information data including the game information collected by the input and the game state history data including the game state history (data classified by state) are transmitted.

  Further, each of these relay units 60 is connected to the hall computer 140 via a hub 57 by a communication cable 58, and the relay unit 60 and the hall computer 140 are both connected by a local area network capable of relatively high-speed data communication. The transmission data transmitted from each collection unit 50 is relayed by the relay unit 60 and transmitted to the hall computer 140, so that the hall computer 140 relates to each slot machine 1. Information can be collected and managed centrally.

  The call lamp device 200 of this embodiment is also connected to the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60 in the same manner as the collection unit 50. The call lamp device 200 and the hall computer 140 are connected via the relay unit 60. The two-way data communication can be performed, and the hall computer 140 can perform the model setting of the slot machine 1 corresponding to each calling lamp device 200 and various condition settings regarding game information. Yes.

  First, the slot machine 1 used in the present embodiment will be described below. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported by a housing 2a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 2a. And a front door 2b.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 2, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the outer periphery of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “plum”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the reel panel 1c of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 5), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any game state in this embodiment) among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state, is stored as credits. Settlement switch 10 operated when paying out medals used for setting medals and betting numbers (returning medals used for setting credits and betting numbers), start switch operated when starting a game 7. Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and an effect switch 56 for use in effects. It is provided so as to be operated by the skill person.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 5) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R (see FIG. 5) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is effective are provided. It has been.

  Further, below the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the front door 1b, a lower panel on which a title of the slot machine 1 and a payout table are printed is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. The set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, and the validity / invalidity of the stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A check switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement at the end of BB, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation). An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (described later with reference to FIG. 3) provided in the housing 1a. And a medal having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. A selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 5) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 5), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 2) becomes valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay line LN becomes valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is used as the winning line. It has been established. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 to LM4. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of the LM1 to LM4, the symbols constituting the particular winning line LN It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 and the lower stage of the reel 2L, which are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage. , The lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set straddling to the right. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 2). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. .

  In this embodiment, an example in which three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are applied has been described. However, even if only one reel is provided and a winning is determined according to the display result of the one reel. It is also possible to have two reels and determine the winning according to the combination of the display results of the two reels, or to have four or more reels, and to win according to the combination of the display results of these reels. It may be determined.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line for supplying power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a single cable and connector. Are connected to each other, and all the connectors that connect these cables and the respective boards are connected to each other so that the respective parts on the side of the effect control board 90 can operate and receive commands from the main control part 41. Become. For this reason, unless the command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90, and only the effect control board 90 side operates. There is no end to it.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a control clock generation circuit 42, a random number clock generation circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a power interruption detection circuit. 48 and a reset circuit 49 are mounted.

  The main control unit 41 is configured by a one-chip microcomputer, executes a control program stored in a ROM 506, which will be described later, and performs processing related to the progress of the game, and also includes a control circuit mounted on the game control board 40. Control each part directly or indirectly.

  The control clock generation circuit 42 generates a control clock CCLK serving as an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the main control unit 41. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via, for example, the control external clock terminal EXC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 43 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the main control unit 41. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via the random number external clock terminal ERC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 6, for example. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 may be set to be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42.

  The switch detection circuit 44 takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The reset circuit 49 includes a watchdog timer, and provides a user reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the watchdog timer expires, that is, when the operation of the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 stops for a certain period of time.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. 6 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU 505, a ROM 506, and a RAM 507. A CTC (counter / timer circuit) 508, a random number circuit 509, a PIP (parallel input port) 510, a serial communication circuit 511, and an address decoding circuit 512.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 6 includes an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of a chip constituting the main control unit 41, a direction control function of an address bus, a data bus, and each control signal. Is a bus interface. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the main control unit 41, and transmits / receives address signals, data signals, various control signals, and the like to / from these external devices. Anything to do. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to internal data of the main control unit 41 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and stores internal data such as a game control program and fixed data stored in the ROM 506, for example. This is a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  The clock circuit 502 provided in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 505 that control the progress of the game in the main control unit 41. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 43. Further, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the main control unit 41.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information serving as internal information of the main control unit 41, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 506 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. Here, it is sufficient that the chip individual number can be read from the user program while the ID number cannot be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 506 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 506, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 505 by using a built-in register of the CPU 505, for example.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the main control unit 41 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal (system reset signal) is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is performed when a low level signal (user reset signal) is input to the external user reset terminal XURST for a certain period of time, or when a time-out signal of the built-in watchdog timer (WDT) is generated, or when running outside the specified area This reset is caused by a predetermined factor such as the occurrence of prohibition (IAT). In this embodiment, as described above, since the watchdog timer (WDT) mounted on the reset circuit 49 is used without using the built-in watchdog timer, a user reset signal is input to the external user reset terminal XURST. Alternatively, a user reset occurs when the out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) occurs.

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 505 is in an interrupt-disabled state. When a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period of time. An interrupt that occurs. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 505, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The maskable interrupt INT is caused by the fact that a low level signal is input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port P3) for a certain period of time, a time-out occurs in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508, Multiple types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It should be.

  The CPU 505 provided in the main control unit 41 executes processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by executing the program read from the ROM 506. At this time, the CPU 505 reads out fixed data from the ROM 506, the CPU 505 writes various data to the RAM 507 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 505 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 507. The CPU 505 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501 or the PIP 510, and the CPU 505 receives the input of various signals via the external bus interface 501 or the serial communication circuit 511. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 is also performed.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 505 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 506. Therefore, the main control unit 41 (or CPU 505) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 505 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 40.

  A ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores a user program for game control, fixed data, and the like. The ROM 506 stores a security check program 506A. The CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 when the main control unit 41 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the slot machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset, and whether the storage content of the ROM 506 has been changed. Execute security check processing to check whether or not. The security check program 506A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 506. Further, the security check program 506A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage content of the external memory externally attached to the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  A RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 507 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least part of the contents of the RAM 507 is stored for a predetermined period. In this embodiment, all areas of the RAM 507 are backup RAMs, and all contents of the RAM 507 are saved for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

  The CTC 508 provided in the main control unit 41 includes, for example, an 8-bit programmable timer built in 3 channels (PTC0 to PTC2), and includes a timer circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has a timer value that is updated in response to a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from a high level to a low level). If it is good. In addition, the CTC 508 may incorporate, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter with 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 is only required to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 resets the start time of the random number generated by the free run counter used for randomly determining the extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset or the random number circuit 509. A free-run counter or the like that is used to randomly determine each time may be included. Alternatively, these free-run counters may be included in an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 different from the CTC 508 such as a backup area of the RAM 507, for example.

  A random number circuit 509 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In the present embodiment, on the game control board 40 side, numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery to be described later is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The CPU 505 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 509 based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 to process or update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery. May be counted. In the following, it is assumed that numerical data indicating random numbers for internal lottery is not processed by software from numerical data extracted by the CPU 505 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware. The random number circuit 509 may be incorporated in the main control unit 41 or may be externally attached to the main control unit 41 as a random number circuit chip different from the main control unit 41. .

  The random number for internal lottery is a value used to determine whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535” in this embodiment.

  The PIP 510 included in the main control unit 41 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and includes an input port P0 to an input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal and an input port P3 serving as a function shared terminal and an input port P5. . The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

  An address decoding circuit 512 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 6 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 505.

  The ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control user program and the security check program 506A. For example, the ROM 506 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 505 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 506 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 505 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the game control board 40.

  The RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 is provided with a game control data holding area 590 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. For example, a DRAM is used as the RAM 507, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 505 has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented each time the CPU 505 fetches an instruction from the ROM 506. Accordingly, the stored value in the refresh register is updated every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 505.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the serial communication circuit 511. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 receives the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the input port. Then, the main control unit 41 executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main), which will be described later, is executed at a certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508.

  The main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 prioritizes according to a predetermined order. An interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, a new interrupt will occur at that point. It will be.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as a basic process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. The switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information. The power supply voltage supplied to the timepiece device 97 and the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, other circuits, etc. , And the sub CPU 91a receives various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs various controls for performing effects, and directly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. To control automatically or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. If the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power interruption process (main) is executed. In the power interruption process (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 507, which will be described later, and destructive diagnosis data (in this embodiment, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 507, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored. In addition to the storage, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 507. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of the values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 507. For this reason, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 at the time of activation, regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset, and the value of the data for destructive diagnosis And the processing state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 507 on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destruction diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state. However, the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the above-described setting change state. It will not be released until

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 507 is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 507 is normal when the power is turned on. In addition, the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 507. However, only the data stored in the RAM 507 that is necessary for returning to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up and the power is turned on. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the data backed up at the time.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, non-saved work, general work, special work, unused area, and stack area.

  Important work items include various indicators, LED display data, I / O input / output data, game time counters, and other data that can be inconvenient to initialize, as well as the RT flag and RT remaining game count described below. Work to be done. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 507 is destroyed at the time of activation. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a game state flag described later. The special work is a work that stores data such as various software random numbers that are initialized only before the setting is started. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 507, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored, and the unused stack area is one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, if it is established, it will be initialized, but the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stores the data in the RAM 507 when the setting key switch 37 is turned on, when a RAM error occurs, when the BB ends, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned off. When not being destroyed, when five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations that are initialized in accordance with each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and transitions to a setting change state, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the storage area of the RAM 507, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the important work and the used stack area, that is, the area from the unsaved work to the unused stack area are initialized. The Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the area of the RAM 507 includes the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area, that is, the area from the general work to the unused stack area. It is initialized. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an off state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 507 is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 507 are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the change of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the change of the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Also good.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs at the time of power-on or the like, initialization 1 is executed, and the control state before that is initialized. The RT flag and the RT remaining game number assigned to are held without being initialized. On the other hand, the gaming state flag assigned to the general work is initialized as initialization 1 is executed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (usually inside, BB (RB)) is determined, and is determined according to the gaming state. The game can be started on the condition that the specified number of bets has been set. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the game state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM 507.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM 507 is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state, and the RT described later are specified. The determination is made according to the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the value of the RT flag, the number of bets, and the set value.

  The random value storage work is a storage area in which numerical data latched simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 7 is stored. Every time new numerical data is latched, the latched numerical data is processed by a timer interruption process thereafter. The numerical data read in (main) and stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest numerical data latched newly.

  In the internal lottery, an internal lottery target, a current gaming state flag value, an RT flag value, and the number of determination values determined corresponding to the set value are stored in a random number for internal lottery (a lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 507. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a storage area of 2 bytes, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work for which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 506A when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. A stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor that makes one turn at a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335) is used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven in 336 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel is described. To explain, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the winning small role is the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is fixed so that it can be drawn to the limit, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames in the winning line, the winning special role is in the range of 4 frames in the winning line Then, a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this example, when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. If the selected special role is given priority over the selected special role, the special role is controlled on the winning line only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. When winning simultaneously, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and the control for aligning the small role on the winning line may be performed only when the special role cannot be drawn.

  If a special player and a replaying player are elected at the same time, such as when a replaying player is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, when the stop operation is performed, In addition, a control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main control unit 41 rotates the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Continuously, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a freeze command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end to the sub control unit 91. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a gaming state command, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, a return command, a setting command, a setting confirmation command, and an operation detection command are transmitted.

  These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets in a state where is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The freeze command is a command indicating whether or not to control the freeze state when it is determined to control to the freeze state, which will be described later, and the timing in the case of controlling to the freeze state. Sometimes sent.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, whether or not there is a winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning. Sent after.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game, the type of RT, and the number of remaining RT games, and is transmitted when the game ends.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. At the time of transition to the setting change state, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when the setting confirmation state is entered. A confirmation command is sent.

  The operation detection command is a switch in which the detection state (on / off) has changed among the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R), whether the detection state has changed from off to on, This command indicates whether the state has changed from on to off and the detection state (on / off) of another switch, and is transmitted when the detection state of any of these operation switches has changed.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in the basic process, and the command data in the command buffer assigned to the non-initialized area is updated to the newly generated command data, and the serial communication circuit The data is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by being transferred to the transmission data register 561 of 511.

  The operation detection command is used when a change in the detection state of any switch is detected in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main) (when edge data of any switch is set). Is generated and stored in the operation detection command storage area, and when an operation detection command transmission request is set, transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command storage area is instructed, and a timer allocation executed thereafter In the command transmission process of the loading process (main), it is stored in the command buffer and transferred to the serial communication circuit 511 to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the stage, and the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc. are controlled based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Performs output control of various rendering devices.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is canceled unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the betting number setting operation is performed during the execution of the effect, that is, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET command indicating that the bet number has been set, Is to be canceled. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub-control unit 91 receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, it receives an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received before, the effect being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing.

  The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to set a winning flag in the RAM 507 to win the internal lottery and allow the winning of the winning combination.

  FIG. 7 to FIG. 10 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a gaming state and RT transition controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state and RT.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the slot machine in the present embodiment is controlled to one of the normal gaming state, the inside 1, 2, RB, and BB (RB), and further the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the normal gaming state). Is controlled to any one of RT0 to RT4.

  Referring to FIG. 7, among the winning combinations, special bonuses include big bonuses 1 to 4 (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB), regular bonuses 1 and 2 (hereinafter, each regular bonus is referred to as RB). ) 6 types of bonuses are included.

  BB1 is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is aligned on the winning line. BB2 is awarded when the combination of “network 7-network 7-network 7” is aligned on the winning line. BB3 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on the winning line. BB4 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line. BB4 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-white 7-net 7” is aligned on the winning line.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB4, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled by the game every time during the BB regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as BBRB).

  The big bonus generated due to the winning of any one of BB1 to BB4 is terminated on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out.

  RB1 wins when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on the pay line. RB2 is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-black 7” is aligned on the winning line.

  When winning one of RB1 and RB2, a transition is made to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB).

  The regular bonus generated due to the winning of either RB1 or RB2 ends on the condition that any winning combination has won 6 times or 12 games have been consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, from the internal winning one of BB1, BB3, RB2 until winning a prize, it is controlled to 1 / RT0 inside, and after winning an internal winning one of BB2, BB4, RB1 Until this is done, the internal control is controlled to 2 · RT0. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, after the big bonus or regular bonus (collectively referred to as a bonus) is completed, the control is performed to normal RT4.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB4, RB1, or RB2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning of these roles, these I won't win a role. The symbols composing BB1 to BB4, RB1, and RB2 ("black 7", "white 7", and "net 7") are arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. This is because it has not been done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small role includes a middle bell, a right-down bell, an upper bell 1 to 8, a middle watermelon, a right-down watermelon, an upper watermelon, a lower cherry, a middle cherry, a one-piece role, and a right-up bell.

  The middle bell is awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN, and eight medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the bells are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a middle bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A downward-sloping bell is when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN. Wins and 8 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one below the bell, and the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one above the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Bell” ”Are lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  Further, either the plum or the replay is arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-down bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, the upper bells 1 to 8 will be described. The upper bell 1 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 2 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 3 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 4 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 5 is awarded when a combination of “plum-orange-orange” is arranged on the winning line LN. The upper bell 6 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 7 is awarded when a combination of “Plum-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 8 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L, the BAR and orange of the middle reel, and the BAR and orange of the right reel 2R are arranged at positions one level below the bell. “Orange-Orange”, “Replay-Orange-BAR”, “Replay-BAR-Orange”, “Replay-BAR-BAR”, “Plum-Orange-Orange”, “Plum-Orange-BAR”, “Plum-BAR-” When any combination of “Orange” and “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned, the “Bell-Bell-Bell” combination is aligned to the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  In the left reel 2L, replays and plums are not arranged within 5 frames, and orange and BAR are not arranged within 5 frames for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of the upper bells 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the winning upper bell configuration symbols must be operated at an appropriate timing. For example, you won't win the winning top bell.

  The middle stage watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is aligned on the winning line LN. When the middle watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, in the left reel 2L, any one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, but for each of the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, It is not placed within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle stage watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle stage watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The right-down watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. When a watermelon with a downward right wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the bell of the left reel 2L is disposed at a position below one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are watermelon. Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is prepared, “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White The combination of “7-watermelon-watermelon” and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the watermelon of the middle reel 2C and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the right-down watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing, the right-down watermelon will be won. There is no.

  The upper watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line LN. When the upper watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position below one of black 7, white 7 and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C are watermelon. Since the replay of the right reel 2R is located one position below the watermelon, “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” are arranged. When any of the combinations is completed, the combinations of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are aligned in the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C and the replay of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the upper watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the upper watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The lower cherries are awarded when the combination of “BAR-Orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)”, “BAR-BAR-ANY”, “BAR-Bell-ANY” on the winning line LN. . When the lower cherries win, two medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, since the BAR of the left reel 2L is arranged one position above the cherry, “BAR-orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)”, “BAR- When any combination of “BAR-ANY” and “BAR-Bell-ANY” is prepared, “Cherry” on the left reel stops at the lower stage, and the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” moves up and down to the right, That is, they are aligned with the invalid lines LM2 and LM4.

  In the middle reel 2C, any one of orange, BAR, and bell is arranged within 5 frames, but in the left reel 2L, BAR is not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the lower cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the lower cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  The middle cherries are awarded when the combination of “cherry-ANY-ANY” is arranged on the winning line LN. When the middle cherries win, a medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, in the left reel 2L, cherries are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the middle cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  One winning combination is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Cherry-Net 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out.

  Referring to FIG. 4, the black 7 of the left reel 2L, the cherry of the middle reel, and the net 7 of the right reel are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if one winning combination is won in an internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. I won't win a prize.

  The bells that go up to the right are "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", "White 7-Bell-" on the winning line LN. When any combination of “BAR” and “Watermelon Bell-BAR” is completed, a prize is awarded and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are one position below the bell. "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", "White 7-Bell-BAR" When any combination of “watermelon-bell-BAR” is aligned, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” goes up to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, BAR One of these is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the re-game player among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying role includes normal replay, lower replay, falling replay, promotion replays 1 and 2, and special replay.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay”, “Replay-Replay-Plum”, “Plum-Replay-Replay”, and “Plum-Replay-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The lower replay includes “Bell-Orange-Orange”, “Belle-Orange-Cherry”, “Belle-Orange-Watermelon”, “Belle-Orange-Black 7”, “Belle-Orange-Net 7”, "Bell-Orange-White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7" , “BELL-BAR-WHITE 7” combination is awarded.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged one position above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged one position above the replay. "Bell-orange-orange", "bell-orange-cherry", "bell-orange-watermelon", "bell-orange-black 7", "bell-orange-net 7", "bell-orange-" "White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7", "Bell-BAR" When any combination of “White 7” is prepared, “Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7”, “Replay-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Chi Lee / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Replay-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / The combination of “net 7 / white 7” is aligned at the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, cherry, watermelon, black 7, net 7 , One of white 7 is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the lower stage replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The tumble replay is awarded when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN.

  Referring now to FIG. 4, the bell of the left reel 2L is located one position above the replay or plum, and the bell of the right reel 2R is located one position below the replay. So, when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is complete, the combination of “replay-replay-replay”, “replay-replay-plum”, “plum-replay-replay”, “plum-replay-plum” goes up to the right. That is, they are aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a fall replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 11, after winning the fall replay in normal / RT0, it is controlled to RT1.

  The promotion replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN. In the left reel 2L, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the promotion replay 1 can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  Promotion Replay 2 is when any combination of “Bell-Orange-Replay”, “Bell-Orange-Plum”, “Bell-BAR-Replay”, and “Bell-BAR-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. Winning a prize.

  Here, referring to FIG. 4, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged one position above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged one position above the replay. Since the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged one position above the bell, “bell-orange-replay”, “bell-orange-plum”, “bell-BAR-replay”, “ When the combination of “bell-BAR-plum” is arranged, the combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged in the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames. ing. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the promotion replay 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 11, after winning a promotion replay (promotional replay 1 or promotion replay 2) in normal / RT1, it is controlled to normal / RT0. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set not to win independently in the internal lottery in normal / RT2 and normal / RT3. Further, when the special combination and the promotion replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2 and the normal / RT3, the internal 1 / RT0 or the internal 2 / RT0 is controlled at that time. For this reason, in the normal / RT2 and normal / RT3, the promotion replay is not won. As a result, the normal / RT2 and normal / RT3 are not controlled from the normal / RT3 to the normal / RT0, and the promotion replay is awarded only when the normal / RT1 is selected, and the normal / RT1 is controlled only from the normal / RT1. It is configured as follows.

  The special replay is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” and “bell-replay-plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, as a general rule, special replays can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are elected.

  As shown in FIG. 11, after winning the special replay in normal / RT0, control is performed to normal / RT2. As will be described later, the special replay is set so as not to be won by itself in the internal lottery in normal / RT1 and normal / RT3. Further, when the special combination and special replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in normal / RT1 and normal / RT3, the internal 1 / RT0 or the internal 2 / RT0 is controlled at that time. Therefore, the special replay is not won in normal / RT1 and normal / RT3. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from normal / RT1, normal / RT3 to normal / RT2, and special replay is awarded only when it is normal / RT0, and only normal / RT0 is controlled to normal / RT2. It is configured as follows.

  Next, the transition outcome will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the transition items are “Replay-Orange-Bell”, “Replay-BAR-Bell”, “Plum-Orange-Bell”, “Plum-BAR-Bell”, “Replay-Bell-Orange”. ”,“ Replay-Bell-BAR ”,“ Plum-Bell-Orange ”,“ Plum-Bell-BAR ”,“ Black 7-Orange-Orange ”,“ Black 7-Orange-BAR ”,“ Black 7-BAR- ” "Orange", "Black 7-BAR-BAR", "White 7-Orange-Orange", "White 7-Orange-BAR", "White 7-BAR-Orange", "White 7-BAR-BAR", "Watermelon -Orange-orange "," Watermelon-orange-BAR "," Watermelon-BAR-orange "," Watermelon-BAR-BAR ". In this embodiment, left bells 1 to 4, middle bells 1 to 4 and right bells 1 to 4, which will be described later, are won, and reels other than the reels that are the winning conditions for the right lowering bell or middle bell are set as the first stop and won. When the upper bell is missed, the above-mentioned transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 11, after the transition points are aligned with the winning line LN in the normal / RT0, normal / RT2, and normal / RT3, control is performed to the normal / RT1. Note that, when the transition outcomes are aligned with the winning line LN in the normal / RT1, the normal / RT1 is maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 17, combinations of lottery object combinations that are read as lottery object combinations for each gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the inside one (BB1, BB3, RB2 is elected) or the inside 2 (BB2, BB4, RB1 is won) State), BB (RB), or RB, and the winning combination and the winning probability for the internal lottery are different. Furthermore, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, at least one of the re-game player and the winning probability to be subject to the internal lottery differs depending on the types of RT0 to RT4. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 13 to FIG. 17, “+” is written between winning winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is read out simultaneously in the internal lottery.

  In FIGS. 13 to 17, the lottery target combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that the lottery target is read out in the gaming state, and a cross indicates the lottery target when in the gaming state. This indicates that the combination is not read out.

  Further, the numerical value shown below the circle indicates the number of determination values of a predetermined set value (for example, set value 1). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536.

  FIGS. 13 and 14 show combinations of special combinations that are read out as lottery targets for each gaming state, FIG. 15 shows combinations of small combinations that are read out as lottery targets for each gaming state, and FIG. The combination of the re-games read out as the lottery target game for each game state is shown. FIG. 17 shows combinations of the combinations that constitute the simultaneous winning combinations shown in FIGS.

  When normal / RT0, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 sheet, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB2 BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle tier cherry, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promotion replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + , BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle tier cherry, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promotion replay, BB3 + special replay, BB4, B4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherries, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 sheets Role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece combination, replay GR11, replay GR12, replay GR13, replay GR14, and replay GR15 are subject to internal lottery.

  Normal / RT1, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 sheet, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB2 BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle tier cherry, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promotion replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + , BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle tier cherry, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promotion replay, BB3 + special replay, BB4, B4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherries, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 sheets Role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, one-piece role, normal replay, replay GR1, replay GR2, replay GR3, replay GR4, replay GR5, and replay GR6 are the subject of internal lottery.

  In normal / RT2, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 sheet, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB2 BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle tier cherry, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promotion replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + , BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle stage cherry, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + tumble replay, BB3 + promotion replay, BB3 + special replay, BB4, B4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherries, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 sheets Role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece combination, normal replay is the target for internal lottery.

  Normal / RT3: BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 double-player, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB2 BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle tier cherry, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promotion replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + , BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle tier cherry, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promotion replay, BB3 + special replay, BB4, B4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherries, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 sheets Role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece combination, normal replay is the target for internal lottery.

  When internal center 1 · RT0, internal center 2 · RT0, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, center bell 1, center bell 2, center bell 3, center bell 4, right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single Role, Normal Replay, Lower Replay, Tumble Replay, Promotion Replay, Special Replay It becomes a target part of the lottery.

  When BBRB · RT0, the weak cherry and the right-up bell are subject to internal lottery, and when RB · RT0, the right-up bell is the subject of internal lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, a weak watermelon is an upper stage watermelon + right lowering watermelon. A strong watermelon is a middle-stage watermelon + right-down watermelon. That is, when the middle stage watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a strong watermelon. Weak cherries are lower cherries alone, strong cherries are lower cherries + 1 piece, whereas weak cherries are controlled so that the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be derived in the middle. The strong cherry is controlled so that the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be derived in the middle stage, the cherry stops in the lower stage of the left reel 2L, and “BAR-BAR-BAR” in the middle stage. You can recognize that it is a strong cherry by having the combination of.

  The bell is a middle bell + a downward-sloping bell. Left bell 1 is right falling bell 5 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8, left bell 2 is right falling bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7, and left bell 3 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3, left bell 4 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4. The left bells 1 to 4 are also simply called left bells. The middle bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 5, the middle bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 6, and the middle bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 7 and the middle bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 8. The middle bells 1 to 4 are also simply called middle bells. The right bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 5, the right bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 7, and the right bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 6 and the right bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 8. The right bells 1 to 4 are also simply called right bells. The left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are also simply referred to as push order bells.

The promotion replay is promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2.
Replay GR1 is normal replay + promotion replay 1, replay GR2 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, replay GR3 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + lower replay, and replay GR4. Is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + lower replay, replay GR5 is normal replay + promotion replay 2, and replay GR6 is normal replay + promotion replay 2 + lower replay.

  Replay GR11 is tumble replay + special replay, replay GR12 is tumble replay + special replay + normal replay, replay GR13 is tumble replay + special replay + lower replay, and replay GR14 is Tumble replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay. Replay GR15 is tumble replay + special replay + promotion replay 1.

  Also, in normal / RT0-3, etc., weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, one piece, normal replay, fall replay, promotion that can be elected simultaneously with any of BB1-BB4, RB1, RB2 The number of replay judgment values for internal 1 · RT0 and internal 2 · RT0 is read separately from the bonus, respectively, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single-player, normal replay, falling Since it is added to the replay and the promotion replay, the winning probability of each of the strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single combination, normal replay, falling replay, and promoted replay is guaranteed.

  In this way, the internal lottery role varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 1 or 2 inside, BB (RB), or RB, and BB (RB) In RB, the internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the small role is set higher than that in the normal gaming state and inside.

  Also, when the game state is 1 or 2 in the inside, the subject of the internal lottery does not change depending on whether it is 1 in the inside or 2 in the inside, but it is 1 in the inside or inside The internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probabilities of the target re-gamer are different.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the re-game player to be subject to the internal lottery differs depending on whether it is RT0-3, and depending on whether it is RT0-3 An internal lottery is performed using a lottery table with different re-game players and their winning probabilities.

  In this embodiment, when a plurality of types of re-game players are won at the same time, as shown in FIG. 18, a re-game player determined according to the types of re-game players won at the same time and the order of stop operations is won. Control is performed so that the line is stopped within a maximum of 4 frames on the line. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of replays are won simultaneously.

  When the replay GR1 (normal replay + promotion replay 1) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When replay GR2 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right middle, control is performed to align the combination of normal replays to the winning line LN and stop.

  If Replay GR3 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle left or right order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replay players will be aligned to the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR4 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle right / left order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replaying players is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When replay GR5 (normal replay + promotion replay 2) is won and stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR6 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected replaying players is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when stop operations are performed in an order other than right center left, control is performed to align the normal replay combination with the winning line LN and stop.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. The reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R according to the operation order.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for allowing the replays GR1 to 6 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT1 where the replays GR1 to 6 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR1 to GR6 is elected, the promoted replay wins with a probability of 1/6, and the normal / RT0 Will be migrated.

  When the replay GR11 (falling replay + special replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, the control of stopping the combination of the special replays in the winning replay combination in the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  When replay GR12 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays on the winning line LN.

  When replay GR13 (falling replay + special replay + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle / left / right order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR14 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is made in the middle right / left order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned to the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When replay GR15 (falling replay + special replay + promotion replay 1) is won and pressed right, that is, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the right reel 2R is first stopped, the special replay among the selected replay players When the stop operation is performed in the operation mode in which the combination of the above is aligned with the pay line LN and left-pressed, that is, in the operation mode in which the left reel 2L is first stopped or in the middle mode, that is, in the operation mode in which the middle reel 2C is first stopped. In this case, a control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays in line with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the symbols constituting the special replay and the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the reel control is performed so that the special replay or the fall replay is always won.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to win special replays and avoid falling replays with the replays GR11 to 15.

  For this reason, if one of the replays GR11 to 15 is elected in the normal / RT0 where the replays GR11 to 15 are the targets of the internal lottery, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/5 and shifts to the normal / RT2. On the other hand, the fall replay wins with a probability of 4/5 and shifts to normal RT1.

  Next, when a plurality of types of small combinations are won simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 19, a maximum of 4 small combinations determined according to the types of small combinations that are simultaneously selected and the order of stop operations are displayed on the winning line. Control is performed so as to stop evenly within the frame drawing range. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of small combinations are won simultaneously.

  If left bell 1 (lower right bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7) wins and the stop operation is performed by pressing to the left, the combination of right down bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 2 (lower right bell + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8) is elected and stopped by left-pressing, the combination of right-down bells in the selected small role is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6 or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 3 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the right falling bell combination of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed such that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 4 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of the right falling bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 4, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the right-down bell configuration symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the left bells 1 to 4 are elected, a stop operation is performed by pushing left. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the right lowering bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the left bells 1 to 4 are elected because there are places that are arranged, if the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right, it becomes the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, the control is performed so that the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles with the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles with the winning line LN is stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 6, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the middle bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by middle push Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the middle bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, an appropriate range that will be drawn in the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 will be used. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells of the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When right bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in line with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 6, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells of the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the right bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by pushing right However, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Therefore, even if the right bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, an appropriate drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 is appropriate. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when any of the left bell, middle bell, right bell, that is, the push order bell is won, by performing a stop operation in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination, While the right-down bell or middle bell always wins, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination, the upper bell is aligned at 1/4, but at 3/4 In some cases, the upper bells are not aligned and the transition outcomes are aligned.

  For this reason, at the time of winning the push order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not it is operated in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, it is impossible to intentionally select a specific operation mode unless the type is known. Although a medal can be surely obtained by winning a prize, the upper bell can be won only by 1/4 at a ratio of 2/3, and a medal cannot be surely obtained.

  Although not particularly shown, when a bell (middle bell + lower right bell) is won, a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order of the reels and the operation timing. To be controlled.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, it is controlled to one of the normal gaming state, the inside 1, the inside 2, RB and BB (RB), and in the normal gaming state, RT0-3 It is controlled by either.

  As described above, the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 is assigned with an area for storing a gaming state flag that can specify a gaming state and an area for storing an RT flag that can specify an RT type. Yes. The gaming state flag is 4-bit data, 0000 indicates the normal gaming state, 0001 indicates the internal one, 0010 indicates the internal two, 0100 indicates the RB, and 1100 indicates the BB (RB). . The RT flag is 4-bit data. 0000 indicates RT0, 0001 indicates RT1, 0010 indicates RT2, 0011 indicates RT3, and 0100 indicates RT4.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when the value of the game state flag is 0000 and the value of the RT flag is 0000, it indicates that the game state flag is RT0 and the game state flag value is 0000 and the RT flag value is 0001. In this case, it indicates that the normal gaming state is RT1, and when the gaming state flag value is 0000 and the RT flag value is 0010, it indicates that the normal gaming state is RT2, and the gaming state flag value is When the value of 0000 and RT flag is 0011, it indicates that the game state is normal and RT3, and when the value of game state flag is 0001 and the value of RT flag is 0000, it indicates that it is 1 inside. When the value of the game state flag is 0010 and the value of the RT flag is 0000, it indicates that the inside is 2, the value of the game state flag is 0100, and the value of the RT flag is 00. 0, indicates a RB, when the value of the gaming state flag is the value of 1100, RT flag 0000 indicates a BB (RB).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the lottery table in which the number of determination values for the target combination is determined, the lottery table for internal one, the lottery table for internal two, the lottery table for RB, and the lottery for BB (RB) Each having a table and a lottery table for a normal gaming state, and further, as a lottery table for a normal gaming state, a lottery table for RT0, a lottery table for RT1, a lottery table for RT2, and a lottery table for RT3 Each has.

  In the internal lottery process, the gaming state flag and the RT flag value stored in the RAM 507 are referred to identify the gaming state and the RT type, select the lottery table accordingly, and select the selected lottery table. By using the lottery, the lottery subject according to the gaming state and the type of RT is drawn with a winning probability according to the gaming state and the type of RT.

  Normal / RT0 is normal / RT1 when a promotion replay wins (when either one of the replays GR1 to GR6 is elected and a stop operation is performed in the order in which the promotion replay wins), normal / RT1 or normal / RT2 Shifts when the game is completed due to the consumption of the specified number of games. At this time, the value of the gaming state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal gaming state, and the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0. Regardless of the number of games after the transition to normal / RT0, the normal / RT0 shifts to the normal / RT1 by winning the fall replay or stopping the transition, or to the normal / RT2 by winning the special replay It ends when the special role is elected and moves to the inside 1 or inside 2 inside.

  Usually, the winning probability for special roles in RT0 is normal (about 1/239), the winning probability for replaying roles is high (about 1 / 1.4), and the winning probability for small roles is normal (about 1 / 3.5) However, the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1), and the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more. Moreover, in normal / RT0, except for the case where the winning combination is made at the same time as the special combination, only the replay GRs 11 to 15 among the re-playing combinations are targeted for the internal lottery.

  The normal / RT1 shifts when the transition is stopped at the normal / RT0, the normal / RT2, and the normal / RT3, or when the fall replay wins at the normal / RT0. At this time, the value of the gaming state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal gaming state, and the value of the RT flag is updated to 0001 indicating RT1. Then, the normal RT1 ends when the promotion replay wins and then shifts to the normal RT0, or when the special role is elected and shifts to the inside 1 or the inside 2.

  Normal / RT1 special role win probability is normal (approx. 1/239), same as RT0, re-game player win probability is lower than normal / RT0 normal (approx. 1 / 7.3), small role win The probability is normal (normally about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1) like RT0, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. Further, in normal / RT1, only normal replay and replay GR1 to replay GR1 to 6 are included in the internal lottery.

  Normal / RT2 shifts when special replay wins in normal / RT0. At this time, the value of the gaming state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal gaming state, and the value of the RT flag is updated to 0010 indicating RT2. Then, the normal / RT2 is terminated when the transition is stopped and the normal / RT1 is transferred to the normal / RT1 or the special combination is elected and the internal / external 1 or internal 2 is transferred.

  Normal / RT2 special role win probability is normal (approx. 1/239), same as RT0, re-game player win probability is almost the same as RT (0), high probability (approx. 1 / 1.4), small The winning probability of the combination is normal (normally about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1) as with RT0, and the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more. Also, in normal / RT2, only the normal replay among the replaying combinations is subject to the internal lottery, except when winning at the same time as the special combination.

  Normally, RT3 shifts to the end of BB (RB) and RB. At this time, the value of the gaming state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal gaming state, and the value of the RT flag is updated to 0011 indicating RT3. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal / RT3, the normal / RT3 stops the transition and moves to the RT1, or the special role is elected and moves to the internal 1 or the internal 2 To finish.

  The winning probability of special roles in normal / RT3 is normal (about 1/239), the winning probability of replaying roles is normal / normally lower than RT0 (about 1 / 7.3), and the winning probability of small roles is normal / RT0 As usual, it is normal (about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1), and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. Moreover, in normal / RT4, except for the case where the winning combination is won at the same time as the special combination, only the normal replay among the re-playing combination is subject to the internal lottery.

  The inside 1 shifts when BB1, BB3, RB2 among the special roles are won in the normal gaming state. At this time, the value of the game state flag is updated to 0001 indicating internal 1 and the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, the inside 1 finishes when the special role that triggered the transition to the inside 1 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB. .

  In the inside 1, the special role is excluded from the internal lottery, and the winning probability of the re-playing role is lower than normal RT0, normal RT2, but higher than normal RT1, normal RT3, and high probability (about 1 /4.2), the winning probability of a small role is normal (about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1), and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. Moreover, in the inside 1, only the normal replay and the lower replay among the re-game players are targeted for the internal lottery.

  The inside 2 shifts when BB2, BB4, RB1 among special roles are won in the normal gaming state. At this time, the value of the game state flag is updated to 0010 indicating 2 inside, and the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0. Then, inside 2 ends regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, when the special combination that triggered the transition to the inside 2 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB. .

  In internal 2, the special role is not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of replaying is lower than normal · RT0, normal · RT2, but higher than normal · RT1, normal · RT3, internal 1 Probability (approx. 1 / 2.9), probability of winning a small role is normal (approx. 1 / 3.5, but winning probability is approx. 1 / 6.1), and medal payout rate per game is less than 1. It becomes. Further, in the inside 2, only the normal replay and the lower replay among the re-game players are targeted for the internal lottery.

  RB shifts when RB1 or RB2 wins in 1 and 2 inside. At this time, the value of the gaming state flag is updated to 0100 indicating RB, and the value of the RT flag does not change from 0000 indicating RT (0). And RB is complete | finished by digesting 6 games or winning 6 times.

  In RB, the special role and re-playing role are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of the small role is higher than normal 1 and 2 in the normal gaming state, high probability (about 1 / 1.01), The payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more.

  BB (RB) shifts when BB wins inside. At this time, the value of the game state flag is updated to 1100 indicating BB (RB), and the value of the RT flag does not change from 0000 indicating RT (0). Then, BB (RB) ends when the total number of medals paid out to BB (RB) exceeds the prescribed number, regardless of the number of games since the transition to BB (RB).

  In BB (RB), special roles and re-playing roles are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of small roles is higher than the normal gaming state, 1 or 2 inside, and high probability (about 1 / 1.00) The medal payout rate per game is 1 or more.

  Among the normal gaming state, 1, 2, RB, and BB (RB), RB and BB (RB) are the most advantageous gaming states with the highest medal payout rate per game.

  RT0 and RT0 of RT0 and 3 in the normal gaming state have a high probability of winning a re-gamer and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT1 and RT3. It can be said that it is a more advantageous state for the player.

  Further, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT0 to 3, the sub-control unit 91 provides an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect that notifies the internal lottery result can be executed. The production state can be controlled. Further, in particular, a state that is controlled by the AT in the normal RT 2 that is advantageous to the player is referred to as assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as ART).

  Here, the gaming state and the transition state of RT will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, when RB or BB (RB) is completed, the state shifts to normal / RT3.

  In normal / RT3, when the transition outcome is stopped, the transition is made to RT1, and when the special role is elected, transition is made to internal 1 or internal 2 according to the type of the special role won.

  In normal / RT3, if any of the left bells 1-4, middle bells 1-4, right bells 1-4 wins, and the small part cannot be won, the transition will stop. Therefore, any of the left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, right bell 1-4 can be elected and a small role can be won in normal / RT3 which has been shifted to after the end of RB or BB (RB) If not, the process moves to normal RT1.

  In normal / RT1, the game proceeds to normal / RT0 when the promotion replay wins, and when the special role is won, it shifts to internal 1 or internal 2 depending on the type of the special role selected.

  Usually ・ Replay GR1-6 wins in RT1, and the promotion replay wins when the stop order is correct. Therefore, in normal ・ RT1, replay GR1-6 wins and corrects in the order of stop. It will shift to RT0.

  In normal / RT0, if the fall replay wins, or if the transition is stopped, it moves to normal / RT1, and if the special replay wins, it moves to normal / RT2, and the special role is won. Depending on the type of the special role, it shifts to 1 inside or 2 inside.

  Usually, the replays GR11 to 15 are elected at RT0, the special replay is won when the stop order is correct, and the fall replay is won when the answer is incorrect. In addition, in the case of normal / RT0, when any one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome stops. For this reason, in normal / RT0, the replay GRs 11 to 15 are elected and the stop order is correct, so that the normal / RT2 is entered, and the replay GRs 11 to 15 are elected and the stop order is incorrect or the left bell 1 -4, middle bell 1 to 4, right bell 1 to 4 are elected, and if it is not possible to win a small role, it will shift to normal · RT1.

  In normal / RT2, when the special role is elected, it shifts to the inside 1 or the inside 2 according to the type of the won special role.

  In normal / RT2, when any one of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4 and the right bell 1 to 4 wins and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome stops. For this reason, in normal / RT2, if any of left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, and right bell 1-4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the routine proceeds to normal / RT1. It will be.

  In the inside 1 and 2, the special role that triggers the transition to the inside wins a transition to RB or BB (RB).

  The sub-control unit 91 performs a navigation stock lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT. In the navigation stock lottery, it is determined whether or not the number of navigation stocks is given and how much the navigation stock number is given.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates the number of rights controlled by the AT over a predetermined number of games (50 games in this embodiment). By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the AT is controlled for a predetermined number of games, and a navigation effect is executed during that time. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the navigation stock lottery, the sub control unit 91 stores the number of navigation stocks in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies whether to control to AT based on the presence / absence of the number of navigation stocks in the RAM 91c. If one or more navigation stock numbers remain, the AT is controlled after passing through the incubation period of 0 to 32 games.

  If the navigation stock number is acquired when the navigation stock number remains, the navigation stock number acquired this time is added to the remaining navigation stock number.

  The sub-control unit 91 can control the AT by consuming the navigation stock when it is normal / RT1-3.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls to AT when the navigation stock remains in the normal / RT1 to RT3 (mainly RT1). During the period from the normal / RT1 to the normal / RT0, the navigation stock number can be executed without being consumed (subtracted) without being consumed (subtracted). At this time, as will be described later, in normal / RT1, the replays GR1 to 6 are subject to navigation effects, and in the navigation effects, the push order for winning the promoted replays when the replays GR1 to 6 are won is notified. It is possible to shift from normal RT1 to normal RT0 by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified pressing order. In addition, after the AT control is started, during the transition from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the push order for winning the bell is informed when the push order bell is won, so the stop operation is performed according to the notified push order. It is also possible to win medals with certainty.

  When the control is performed by the AT and when the normal / RT0 shifts to the normal / RT2, the number of navigation stock is consumed (subtracted) and the control is performed by the AT until the predetermined number of games elapses. When the navigation stock number is consumed by 1, the navigation stock number is decremented by 1. During this time, if it is normal / RT0 as will be described later, it will be the target of the navigation effect when the replays GR11 to 15 are selected, and the push order bell will be changed to normal / RT1, normal / RT0, normal / RT2 after the AT control starts. Regardless, it is the target of navigation production. In the navigation effect, in the normal / RT0, the push order for winning the special replay is notified when the replays GR11 to 15 are selected, so the stop operation is performed according to the notified push order to change from the normal / RT0 to the normal / RT1. It is possible to shift to normal / RT2 without shifting. Also, in both normal / RT0 and normal / RT2, when the push order bell is won, the transition outcome is avoided and the push order for winning the bell is notified, so by performing the stop operation according to the notified push order It is possible to acquire medals without shifting from normal RT0 or normal RT2 to normal RT1.

  The sub-control unit 91 counts the number of games in which the navigation effect executed by the navigation stock is executed when the navigation stock is consumed, that is, when the normal / RT0 shifts to the normal / RT2 (50 games in this embodiment). ) Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 controls to AT during a period until the number of games in the RAM 91c becomes zero. When the number of games remains and the target role of navigation is won, a navigation effect is executed.

  In addition, after the AT starts, if the additional target role (for example, cherry, watermelon, etc.) is elected after the predetermined number of games elapses and the AT ends, the number of games is newly added to the number of games until the AT ends When an additional lottery for determining whether or not to be added is performed, and the additional lottery is won, the number of selected additional games is added to the predetermined number of games stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. In other words, when the additional target combination is won during the AT and the additional lottery is won, the AT is controlled by the AT for a longer period.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls to be non-AT when the remaining number of games becomes 0 when it is AT.

  When controlled to non-AT, the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, when normal / RT2, the possibility of matching the transition outcomes is increased, and the possibility of being controlled to normal / RT1 is increased.

  In addition, if the navigation stock remains after being controlled to non-AT, after the incubation period of 0 to 32 games is passed as in the case where a new navigation stock is won, the control is again made to the AT. As a result, until the number of navigation stocks becomes zero, the AT and the latent period are repeatedly controlled.

  If the sub-control unit 91 is controlled by the AT, the sub-control unit 91 performs a navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state. The navigation target combination corresponding to the game state is replay GR1-6 when it is normal / RT1, and replay GR11-15 when it is normal / RT0. Further, in normal and RT0 to 2, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  As a navigation effect when winning the replays GR1 to GR6, a push order (see FIG. 18) for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR2, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR3 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 4 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR5, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 6 is won, a message such as “Right Middle Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR11 to 15 are won, a push order (see FIG. 18) for winning a special replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR11. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 12, a message such as “Middle right and left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 13, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 14, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 15 is won, a message such as “Right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when one of the push order bells is won, a push order (see FIG. 19) for surely winning a right-down bell or a middle bell is notified. For example, when winning the left bell, the left reel is stopped as the first stop reel, so that the right falling bell can be reliably won, so “left!” For stopping the left reel as the first stop reel. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the middle bell is won, the middle bell can be surely won by stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel, so “medium!” For stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, when the right bell is won, the middle bell can be reliably won by stopping the right reel as the first stop reel, so “right!” For stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. In addition, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  Then, by executing the navigation effect, it is possible to win the promotion replay winning, the special replay winning, and the bell winning that are intentionally won, and to avoid the falling replay winning.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 20, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main control unit 41, and the information providing terminal board of the game store (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Through 1010, the data is output to an external device such as a data display terminal installed corresponding to the hall computer or the slot machine 1.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that the RB is in the later state, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the BB state, which will be described later, an RT2 signal indicating one of normal / RT2 start and end, and the front door 1b being open A door opening signal indicating that the setting has been shifted to a setting changing mode, which will be described later, a insertion error signal indicating that the medal selector is abnormal, and a payout error signal indicating that the hopper unit 34 is abnormal are output. .

  In this embodiment, in order to share with other slot machines, the game state is shown between the game control board 40 and the external output board 1000 in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals. A spare signal line is connected, and an error output signal line that may be expanded in the future is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the RT2 signal are directly output to the information providing terminal board 1010 through the relay circuit 1001 as pulse signals. Is done.

  On the other hand, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the paying error signal are converted by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 into security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified. Output to the provided terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, and RT2 signal output from the external output board 1000 are output to an external device via the information providing terminal board 1010. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a payout error signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the external device. It becomes.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the external device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment, particularly control contents related to external output control will be mainly described with reference to FIGS.

  When the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs the startup process (main) shown in the flowchart of FIG. When a user reset signal is input, the process starts from the step Sa2 of the startup process (main). That is, while starting from the security mode in which the security check process is performed only in the case of activation upon power-on, the user program stored in the ROM 506 is executed by omitting the security check process in the case of activation due to time-up of the watchdog timer. The user mode is started.

  In the startup process (main) accompanying the input of the system reset signal, first, the CPU 505 executes the security check process based on the security check program 506A read from the ROM 506 (Sa1). At this time, the main control unit 41 enters the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 506 is not yet executed.

  After the security check process in step Sa1, the operation state of the main control unit 41 shifts from the security mode to the user mode, and the execution of the user program stored in the ROM 506 is started. As described above, at the time of start-up accompanying the input of the user reset signal, the user mode is started without going through the security mode.

  In the user mode, first, internal devices such as the serial communication circuit 511 and peripheral ICs, interrupt mode, stack pointer, detection status of switches, output status of external output signals, etc. are initialized (Sa2), then the I register and IY The register value is initialized (Sa3). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 507 is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 507 is permitted (Sa4), and RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 507 are calculated (Sa5). Next, the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 are acquired, and after setting the stop function and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the main control unit 41 (Sa6), a power failure is detected. The power interruption flag indicating that is cleared (Sa7).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in step Sa5 is 0 (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt process (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 507 is not normal. In this case, after executing initialization 1 (Sa22) for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 507 except the used stack area and the non-initialization area, is the setting key switch 37 turned on? If the setting key switch 37 is on, interrupt is permitted (Sa21), and the setting change process, that is, the setting change state is entered.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa23, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa24), interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process proceeds to error processing, that is, RAM abnormality error state. .

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If the power interruption processing (main) is normally performed, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set, and if the data for failure diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 507 is not normal. Therefore, the process proceeds to step Sa22 to execute initialization 1, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in step Sa23. If this is the case, the interruption is permitted (Sa21), and the process proceeds to the setting change process. If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in step Sa23, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set (Sa24), interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process proceeds to error processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa9 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 507 is normal. Therefore, the destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa10), and the unstored work, the unused area, and the unused area in the RAM 507 are cleared. After initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa11), it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa12). If the setting key switch 37 is on, the process proceeds to step Sa20. Initialize 1 is executed, interrupt is permitted (Sa21), and the process proceeds to the setting change process.

  If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa12, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, the state stored in the stack (Sa13), and the output control of RT2 signal described later in the state after restoration is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (Sa14). If the output control of the RT2 signal is not being controlled in the state after the return in the step of Sa14, it is further determined whether or not the state after the return is normal / RT2 (Sa15). If the state after the return in step Sa15 is not normal / RT2, the process proceeds to step Sa17 and the output of the RT2 signal is being controlled in the state after return in step Sa14, or the state after the return is in step Sa15. If it is normal / RT2, the RT2 signal output command is set in the RAM 41c (Sa16), and then the process proceeds to step Sa17.

  In step Sa17, it is determined whether the game state after return is BB or RB, and if the game state after return is neither BB nor RB, the process proceeds to step Sa18. If the game state after the return is BB or RB, a change command for the BB signal and RB signal is set in the RAM 41c (Sa18), and then the process proceeds to step Sa18. In step Sa18, if the game state after the return is BB, a change command is set to change the BB signal to ON, and if it is RB, the RB signal is changed to ON. Set the instruction. In this embodiment, since RB is always controlled during BB, if the game state after return is BB, a change command for changing both the BB signal and the RB signal to ON. Will be set.

  In step Sa19, the interrupt is permitted, and then the process returns to the last execution before power interruption.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main control unit 41 after the setting change process.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. . In the BET process, as a process for starting the game, when the start switch 7 is operated, an output command for instructing output of a medal IN signal for the number of medals used for the set bet number is set in the RAM 41c. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in the step of Sd2, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is allowed based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sd1. Process. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 507 based on each lottery result.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win. In the payout process, an output command for instructing output of a medal OUT signal for the number of medals given to the player by adding credits and paying out medals is set in the RAM 41c.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. In the process at the end of the game, a change command for changing the BB signal to ON is set in the RAM 41c when shifting from the next game to BB, and an RB signal is switched when shifting from the next game to RB. A change instruction for changing to ON is set in the RAM 41c. On the other hand, when BB ends in the game, a change command for changing the BB signal to OFF is set in the RAM 41c, and when RB ends in the game, the RB signal is changed to OFF. A change command is set in the RAM 41c. When normal RT2 starts from the next game and when normal RT2 ends in the game, an RT2 signal output command is set in the RAM 41c. That is, the RT2 signal output command is set when a special replay that triggers control of normal / RT2 is won, and when a transition event that triggers termination of normal / RT2 stops.

  FIG. 23 shows an external output control process that is executed once every time the above-described timer interrupt process (main) is executed four times by the main control unit 41 periodically (about 0.56 ms) and interrupting and executing the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the external output control process, first, it is determined whether or not an RT2 signal output command is set (Sk101). If an RT2 signal output command is set, the process proceeds to Sk102. As described above, the RT2 signal output command is set when normal RT2 starts from the next game and when normal RT2 ends in the game.

  In Sk102, the output command is cleared, the output of the RT2 signal is started in Sk103, and the value of the RT2 output counter for specifying the period during which the RT2 signal is output is added in Sk104, and the process proceeds to Sk114. . The value of the RT2 output counter is stored in the RAM 41c.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in Sk101 that the RT2 signal output command is not set, the process proceeds to Sk105 to determine whether or not the RT2 signal is being output (output control is being performed).

  If it is determined in Sk105 that the RT2 signal is being output, the value of the RT2 output counter is incremented by 1 in Sk106, and the process proceeds to Sk107. In Sk107, when one game is completed and the medal OUT signal is output, it is determined whether or not the output is completed. Specifically, whether or not the newly started game has ended since the output of the RT2 signal has been started and the process has shifted to the game end process in Sd6 in FIG. 22, and whether or not the medal OUT signal is being output. It is determined whether or not. In Sk107, when one game is finished and the medal OUT signal is not output, or after one game is finished and when the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the process proceeds to Sk108.

  In Sk107, when one game is over and if it is determined that the medal OUT signal has been output after the completion of the output, the value of the RT2 outputting counter is determined in Sk108. It is determined whether a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more has been reached. In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to 2000 ms or more is 2000 ÷ (interval in which external output control processing is executed = 0.56 × 4) ≈892.8, and thus is a value of 893 or more. In Sk108, if 2000 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the output of the RT2 signal to the end of the newly started game, it is determined that a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more has been reached.

  When it is determined in Sk108 that the value of the RT2 output counter has reached a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more, the output of the RT2 signal is stopped and the value of the RT2 output counter is reset in Sk109 and the process proceeds to Sk114. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in Sk108 that the value of the RT2 output counter has not reached a value equivalent to 2000 ms or more, a time unreachable flag indicating that it has not reached in Sk110 is set in the RAM 41c. The time unachieved flag is set when the game is newly started and ended by 2000 ms after the output of the RT2 signal is started. For this reason, the case where the time non-achievement flag is set corresponds to, for example, the case where the current game is immediately started after the previous game is ended and then the stop switch is operated to end it. If the time not reached flag is set in Sk110, the process proceeds to Sk114 without stopping the output of the RT2 signal.

  When it is determined at Sk107 that the medal OUT signal is being output even when one game is not finished or at the end of one game, it is judged at Sk111 whether or not the time unreachable flag is set. That is, after the RT2 signal is output and after a new game is over, 2000 ms has not passed when the one game is over, so the RT2 signal is still being output. It is determined whether or not there is.

  If it is determined in Sk111 that the time non-achieved flag is set, it is determined in Sk112 whether or not it is the timing when the medal IN signal output control is finished. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one newly started game is finished after the RT2 signal is output and the output of the medal IN signal of the next started game is finished.

  When it is determined in Sk112 that it is the timing when the output control of the medal IN signal is finished, the output of the RT2 signal is stopped in Sk113, the value of the RT2 output counter is reset, the time unreachable flag is cleared, The process proceeds to Sk114.

  When it is determined at Sk105 that the RT2 signal is not being output, when it is determined at Sk111 that the time unreachable flag is not set, or at Sk112, it is determined that it is not the timing when the medal IN signal output control is finished. If so, go to Sk114.

  In Sk114, it is determined whether or not the medal IN signal output is being controlled. The medal IN signal is such that a signal of about 25 ms is output with an interval of about 25 ms for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command, and the medal IN signal output command is set. After that, if the output control of the designated number of medal IN signals has not been finished yet, the process proceeds to step Sk116. On the other hand, if the medal IN signal output control is not in progress, it is determined whether or not the medal IN signal output command is set (Sk115). If the medal IN signal output command is set, the process proceeds to step Sk116. move on.

  In step Sk116, the medal IN signal output process is performed, the external output control process is terminated, and the original position of the timer interrupt process (main) is restored. In the medal IN signal output process, when the medal IN signal output command is set, the medal IN signal output command is cleared, and the medal IN signals for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command. The output control of the medal IN signal is being controlled, and the output of the medal IN signal is being controlled at an interval of approximately 25 ms for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command. If the medal IN signal output control for the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal output command is not completed, the medal IN signal output control is continued, and the medal IN signal output command is specified. If the output of the medal IN signals for the number of medals has been completed, the medal IN signal output control is terminated.

  If the medal IN signal output command is not set in the step of Sk115, it is determined whether or not the medal OUT signal output is being controlled (Sk117). The medal OUT signal is such that a signal of about 25 ms is output with an interval of about 25 ms corresponding to the number of medals specified by the output command of the medal OUT signal, and the output command of the medal OUT signal is set. After that, if the output of the specified number of medal OUT signals has not been completed yet, the process proceeds to step Sk119. On the other hand, if the medal OUT signal output control is not in progress, it is determined whether or not the medal OUT signal output command is set (Sk118). If the medal OUT signal output command is set, the process goes to step Sk119. move on.

  In step Sk119, after the medal OUT signal output process is performed, the external output control process is terminated and the process returns to the original position of the timer interrupt process (main). In the medal OUT signal output processing, when the medal OUT signal output command is set, the medal OUT signal output command is cleared, and the medal OUT signals for the number of medals specified by the medal OUT signal output command. The output control of the medal OUT signal is being performed, and the output of the medal OUT signal is being controlled while the signal of approximately 25 ms is output at an interval of approximately 25 ms for the number of medals specified by the output command of the medal OUT signal. If the medal OUT signal output control for the number of medals specified by the medal OUT signal output command is not completed, the medal OUT signal output control is continued and the medal OUT signal output command is specified. If the output of the medal OUT signal for the number of medals has been completed, the output control of the medal OUT signal is terminated.

  If the medal OUT signal output command is not set in the step of Sk118, it is determined whether or not a change command for the BB signal or RB signal is set (Sk120), and the BB signal or RB signal is determined. When a signal change command is set, the output state (ON / OFF) of the BB signal or RB signal is changed according to the command and the change command is cleared (Sk121), and the external output control process is performed. End and return to the original position of timer interrupt processing (main).

  Further, when the BB signal or RB signal change command is not set in the step of Sk120, the external output control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the original position of the timer interrupt process (main).

  As described above, the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment sets an output command of an external output signal in the startup process (main) or the game process, and then interrupts and executes the startup process or the game process. The output control of the external output signal is performed according to the output command set in the timer interrupt process (main).

  As a result, the number of bets used as a game start condition in the BET process is set, and every time control for starting the game is performed by performing the game start operation, the number of bets used for setting the bet number of the game is set. The control for outputting the medal IN signal is performed. Further, when medals are paid out in the payout process, control is performed to output medal OUT signals for the number of payout medals. Also, control is performed to output a BB signal, an RB signal, and an RT2 signal in accordance with the transition of the gaming state in the game end process. Among them, the output of the RT2 signal is ended when the next game is finished or when the output of the medal IN signal in the game is stopped, which is a period during which the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal cannot be outputted.

  In the external device, it is possible to specify the start and end of normal / RT2, that is, a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the RT2 signal, specify the number of medals consumed based on the medal IN signal, It becomes possible to specify the number of medals paid out based on the OUT signal. Further, since the medal IN signal is a signal that is output with the start of the game, the output of the medal IN signal can also be determined as the start of the game.

  Although the RT2 signal is output over 2000 ms at the shortest, the RT2 signal can be reliably detected even in an external device such as an old hallcon that requires a relatively long time to detect a gaming state signal. Since this time is longer than the time required for the player to perform the setting operation of the bet number as the game start condition after the game ends and to start the game, the time from the start of the output of the RT2 signal When the player performs the setting operation of the betting number as a game start condition and the control for starting the game is performed after 2000 ms elapses, the RT2 signal and the medal are covered. An IN signal may be output. In particular, when shifting to normal / RT2 in the event of special replay winning as in this embodiment, the bet number of the next game is automatically made. In such a case, the RT2 signal is applied. The possibility that the medal IN signal is output is further increased.

  When the RT2 signal and the medal IN signal are output, whether the number of medals specified by the medal IN signal is normal or after the start of RT2, or is normal or before the start of RT2, A game after the start of normal / RT2 that cannot be surely specified whether it is the one after the end of normal / RT2 or before the end of normal / RT2 or is specified by the medal IN signal Or whether it is a game before the start of normal / RT2, or a game after the end of normal / RT2, or whether it is a game before the end of normal / RT2. Problems arise.

  In order to solve such a problem, a method of invalidating the betting number setting operation or the game starting operation of the next game until the RT2 signal output period ends may be considered. Thus, although the RT2 signal and the medal IN signal are not output, the progress of the game is delayed, and the bet number setting operation or the game start operation is invalidated, thereby There is also a risk of giving a sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, control for outputting the RT2 signal as an external output signal is started at the end of the game immediately before the start of normal / RT2 and at the end of the game at the end of normal / RT2. Is output, the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal are output in accordance with the progress of the game, and the game is ended, as in the case where the RT2 signal is not output.

  The RT2 signal is stopped at a specific timing that is not included in a predetermined period in which the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal can be output, that is, the timing when the newly started game is ended after the output is started. . It should be noted that when the end of the game has not passed 2000 ms since the start of RT2 signal output, there is a possibility that the signal cannot be reliably specified by the external device as described above. The control is stopped at a predetermined timing that is not included in a predetermined period during which the medal IN signal or the medal OUT signal can be output.

  As a result, the external device, for example, specifies that it is controlled to normal / RT2 when the output of the RT2 signal is stopped when it is not specified to be normal / RT2, and the end timing is one game. When it is the end time, the medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the finished game is determined as a medal in normal / RT2, and the end timing is the timing when the output control of the medal IN signal is ended. When the game is executed, the medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the current game and the previous game being executed is determined as a medal in the normal / RT2.

  In addition, for example, when it is specified that the normal / RT2 is output, the external device specifies that the normal / RT2 has ended when the output of the RT2 signal is stopped, and the end timing is at the end of one game. When it is, the medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the finished game is determined as a medal that is not in normal / RT2, and the end timing is the timing when the output control of the medal IN signal is ended. Sometimes, the medals specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the current game and the previous game being executed are determined as medals that are not in normal / RT2.

  Here, the RT2 signal output start timing and end timing will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25 are timing charts when the next game ends after 2000 ms has elapsed since the end of the game control of the game that won the special replay and the output of the RT2 signal started. FIG. 25 shows a case where medals have been paid out in the next game.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the output of the RT2 signal is started when the game control of the game won in the special replay is finished. Thereafter, the game start operation of the next game is performed, and when the next game is newly started, the medal IN signal is output for a predetermined period. When the game control of the game is finished, the RT2 signal is output. Output ends. The period during which the medal IN signal is output is determined to be constant according to the number of medals bet. As shown in FIG. 24, the period during which the medal IN signal is output when the bet number is 3 is 25 × 5 = 125 ms.

  In FIG. 25, since the medal payout has occurred in the next game, the game control is ended after the medal OUT signal is output for a predetermined period. The period during which the medal OUT signal is output is determined to be constant according to the number of medals paid out. As shown in FIG. 25, the period during which the medal OUT signal is output when the payout number is 8 is 25 × (8 + 7) = 375 ms. When a medal payout occurs in a game in which the output of the RT2 signal is stopped, after a period in which the medal OUT signal is output after all reels stop and after the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, The output of the RT2 signal is stopped.

  FIG. 26 is a timing chart when the next game is finished before 2000 ms elapses after the game control of the game won in the special replay is finished and the output of the RT2 signal is started. The output of the RT2 signal does not end even if the next game newly started after the start of output ends, and after the game is started and the output over the predetermined period of the medal IN signal is completed, the RT2 signal is output. The output is finished.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the RT2 signal output command is set again during the RT2 signal output control, that is, after the RT2 signal output starts and before the output control ends (RT2 start). In the case of termination immediately after that), the RT2 signal is output again after completing the output of the RT2 signal. On the other hand, when returning to the state before the power interruption at the time of power-on, when returning to the state where the output control of the RT2 signal is being performed, the RT2 signal output command is set before the return, and the RT2 signal is newly set from that point. Is output.

  For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, even after the slot machine 1 is turned on, the RT2 signal is output again even when the output control of the RT2 signal is resumed. The signal can be received reliably. FIG. 27 shows an example when the game is over after 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of RT2 signal output, and FIG. 28 shows the game until 2000 ms has elapsed after the RT2 signal output is started again. Shows an example when is finished.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 28, when the slot machine 1 is turned on and returned to the normal / RT2 state, the RT2 signal is output even when the normal / RT2 is not started or ended. Even when the store is opened with the normal / RT2 state of the previous day remaining, the external device can be made to recognize the normal / RT2 state as the normal / RT2 of the current day.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the RT2 signal is output both at the start and at the end of the normal / RT2 as in the present embodiment, when the normal / RT2 continues from the previous day when the store is opened, the RT2 signal is output when the power is turned on. If it is not output, the RT2 signal will be output for the first time at the end of normal / RT2, but in such a case, the external device will mistake the end of normal / RT2 as the start of the first normal / RT2 on that day. As described above, when the power is turned on and the normal / RT2 state is restored, the RT2 signal is output even when the normal / RT2 is not started or ended. Thus, it is possible to prevent the start / end of normal / RT2 from being erroneously performed on the external device side.

  In the present embodiment, the RT2 signal is output both at the start and end of normal / RT2, and the external device recognizes not only the start of normal / RT2 but also the end of normal / RT2. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp the events that occur while the external device is normally controlled to RT2.

  In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the RT2 signal is output from the same signal terminal for the same period both at the start and end of normal / RT2, but at the start of normal / RT2 and the end of normal / RT2 It is configured to output from different signal terminals at different times, or the signal terminals to be output are the same, but the configuration in which the output time is different at the start of normal / RT2 and at the end of normal / RT2, that is, different It may be configured as an output mode, and by configuring as such, it is possible to accurately specify the start of normal / RT2 and the end of normal / RT2 on the external device side. Become.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 28, when the next game is finished by the time 2000 ms elapses after the output of the RT2 signal is started, the medal IN signal in the game is output one after another. The example in which the output of the RT2 signal is stopped after completion has been described. However, the timing of stopping when the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal cannot be output and 2000 ms or more has elapsed. The output of the RT2 signal may be stopped at any timing as long as the timing is different from (at the end of game control of the next game in this embodiment). Further, when the next game is finished by 2000 ms after starting the output of the RT2 signal, as shown in FIG. 29, when 2000 ms has elapsed from the start of the output of the RT2 signal, the medal The output of the RT2 signal may be stopped in a period during which the IN signal and the medal OUT signal cannot be output.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when winning a navigation stock lottery and acquiring one or more navigation stocks, AT control is started after a latent period of 0 to 32 games. This AT is continued as one set of ATs until a predetermined number of games (50 games + α (addition number) in this embodiment) elapses from the time of transition to normal / RT2.

  After AT starts, if one of the replays GR1 to GR6 is won in normal / RT1, a navigation effect for winning the promotion replay is executed by the sub-control unit 91, and the promotion replay is performed by performing a stop operation in accordance with this. When winning, transition from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, and when one of the replays GR11 to 15 is elected in normal / RT1, the sub-control unit 91 performs a navigation effect for winning a special replay, and accordingly The special replay wins by performing the stop operation, and shifts from normal / RT0 to normal / RT2. Thereafter, if the stop operation is performed according to the navigation effect except when the special role is interrupted, etc., the normal / RT2 control is performed until the AT ends.

  Then, when the AT is completed after the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the state becomes a non-AT state. After that, the push order bell is won and the transition is stopped, so that the transition to normal / RT1 is performed. It becomes.

  Even if navigation stock remains at the end of AT, it will be in a non-AT state once and will be controlled again by AT after a latent period of 0 to 32 games. Is more likely to shift from normal / RT2 to normal / RT1 and then to normal / RT0 again through normal / RT0 with the start of AT.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, since the RT2 signal is output at the start and end of normal / RT2, an external output signal indicating that it is controlled by the AT is output. Even if not, it is possible to specify the number of times controlled by the external device by the RT2 signal by the RT2 signal, and the start and end of the AT are almost the same as the start and end of the normal RT2. Since they coincide, it is possible to specify the start and end of the AT by the external device by the RT2 signal, though roughly.

  As described above, the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the slot machine according to the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention. However, it goes without saying that it is included in the present invention.

  For example, in this embodiment, the RT2 signal is output for a minimum of 2000 ms, but at least the time can be specified on the external device side, and the output time is appropriately set according to the external device to be connected. Selectable. Further, the slot machine side may be provided with a setting means for setting the minimum output time of the RT2 signal so that it can be arbitrarily set according to the connected external device. In this case, in Sk108 of FIG. 23, it is determined whether or not the minimum output time set by the setting means has elapsed. If it has elapsed, the process proceeds to Sk109, and if not, the process proceeds to SK110. May be.

  In this embodiment, the RT2 signal is output at the start and end of normal / RT2. However, the RT2 signal may be output only at the start or end of the normal / RT2. If the control can be specified, a normal timing from the start to the end of RT2 (for example, after a predetermined number of games from the start of RT2), a timing before the start of normal RT2 (for example, The configuration may be such that the RT2 signal is output at a timing after the start of normal / RT2 (for example, after the predetermined number of games after the start of normal / RT2). According to the configuration, it is possible to specify the number of times controlled to normal / RT2 at least on the external device side.

  Further, in this embodiment, normal RT 2 is applied as a gaming state in which the state is notified to an external device by outputting an external output signal over a predetermined period, but the winning probability of the re-gamer is high. Game state, for example, BB or RB, that is, a state where the winning probability of a small role is higher than usual, a state where all small roles are allowed (reel pulling is partially limited, and all small roles are allowed to win) CB (challenge bonus), CT (challenge time), etc.)), and a gaming state in which the probability of transition to a state advantageous to the player is higher than usual may be applied. Furthermore, the game state is not limited to a game state advantageous to the player. For example, the game state itself is disadvantageous for the player, but the game state can be started after a certain number of games. An unfavorable gaming state may be applied as long as it is a gaming state in which useful information can be obtained by specifying the end or the like.

  Further, in the embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine in which the bet number is set using the medal and credit as the game value has been described, but the bet number is set using the game ball as the game value. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credit as a gaming value to set a bet amount. In the case of using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the first embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  Next, the call lamp device 200 used in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the call lamp device 200 of the present embodiment is provided with a lamp plate that can be opened and closed at the upper side position of the game island. The display unit 209 is attached to the display unit 209, and the control unit 300 is provided separately from the display unit 209 and includes a control board 270 connected to the display unit 209 via a connection cable 271.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the display unit 209 used in this embodiment has a structure in which a display substrate 260 is housed in a housing made up of a base body 280 and a cover body 250 that covers the top of the base body 280. The cover body 250 is integrated by engaging engagement claws 281 erected at both end positions of the base body 280 with engagement holes 254 formed on the side surface of the cover body 250. 282 in the figure are columnar protrusions for fixing the four corners of the display substrate 260 with screws.

  An opening 251 is formed on the front surface of the cover body 250 so that the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 266 mounted on the display substrate 260 can be seen from the outside. Further, input buttons 255a to 255d that can be operated by the player and a receiving window 257 that transmits infrared rays from a corresponding remote controller (not shown) are formed near the lower part of the outer periphery of the opening 251. On the upper surface 260a of the display substrate 260, input switches 262a to 262d corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d and a receiving unit 265 for receiving an infrared signal from the remote controller are mounted.

  In addition, on both the left and right sides of the cover body 250, notification lamp cover portions 250a formed of red, yellow, and blue transparent resin materials are formed from the upper side of the cover body 250, and the upper surface 260a of the display substrate 260 is formed. The light bulbs 267 are mounted symmetrically at positions corresponding to the respective colors of the notification lamp cover portion 250a, and the notification lamp is formed by the notification lamp cover portion 250a and the light bulb 267.

  The liquid crystal display device 266 mounted on the display substrate 260 has a display screen 261 formed by arranging a liquid crystal (LCD) panel 263, which will be described later, as a flat display so as to face the opening 251 of the cover body 250. 261 displays game information such as the number of regular bonuses, the number of big bonuses, the number of games between bonuses and the number of ARTs of the slot machine 1 to which the calling lamp device 200 is connected, and the player on the display screen 261. In the lower display area on the side, input menus respectively corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d are displayed at respective positions facing the input buttons 255a to 255d.

  The LCD panel 263 used in this embodiment is a dot matrix LCD panel capable of full color display, and can display various characters, numbers, graphs, and the like in various display colors.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a dot matrix LCD panel is used as a display panel for forming the display screen 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display screen 261 is, for example, an EL panel. Alternatively, an LED panel, a fluorescent tube display device, or a segment display may be used.

  In addition, a transparent touch panel (not shown) is provided on the upper portion of the LCD panel 263, and position information that can specify the position selected by the player on the screen is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the control board 270. As a result, the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 can identify the position selected by the player and perform processing according to the content displayed at the selected position.

  Further, an EL backlight 295 is disposed at the lower part of the LCD panel 263, and surface emission is performed by connecting a driver circuit 294 that supplies a predetermined high frequency power to the EL backlight 295, and the LCD panel 263 is moved downward. The LCD panel 263 and the EL backlight 295 are arranged on a base 298 installed on the display substrate 260, and polycarbonate as a transparent protective member that covers the front surface of the LCD panel 263. The engagement protrusions 291 provided on the plate 290 are engaged with the engagement grooves provided at the four corners of the base 298, so that the LCD panel 263 and the EL backlight 295 are sandwiched and integrated. The polycarbonate plate 290 can be easily attached and detached by removing the engaging protrusion 291 in this way. Going on. The driver circuit 294 is connected to the control microcomputer 279 via the connection port 272 (see FIG. 32), and the lighting of the EL backlight 295 is controlled by the control microcomputer 279.

  The LCD panel 263 is connected to the control microcomputer 279 via the LCD driver 264 mounted on the lower surface 260b of the display substrate 260 and the connection port 272 (see FIG. 32), and is based on display data output from the control microcomputer 279. The display is displayed on the LCD panel 263. The control microcomputer 279 is connected to the input switches 262a to 262 through the connection port 272. When the input buttons 255a to d are operated and the input switches 262a to 262d are input, The processes corresponding to the input switches 262a to 262d on each screen are performed.

  The LCD driver 264 also incorporates the above-described transparent touch panel drive (driver) circuit, and the above-described position specifying information is transmitted to the control microcomputer 279 via the LCD driver 264 and the connection port 272 (see FIG. 32). Is output.

  In addition, the receiving unit 265 is an infrared signal transmitted from a remote controller (not shown) operated by a store clerk of the game hall, for example, “Decision (OK)”, “No (NG)”, “Up”, “ By receiving a predetermined signal corresponding to “down”, etc., converting the received signal into a predetermined data string and outputting it to a control microcomputer 279 described later, the control microcomputer 279 is selected by the remote controller. (OK) "," impossible (NG) "," up "," down ", and other operation contents can be grasped.

  In addition, a lighting control circuit 268 that performs lighting control such as lighting and extinguishing of the light bulb 267 is mounted on the lower surface 260b of the display substrate 264, and the lighting control circuit 268 is also connected via the connection port 272 (see FIG. 32). The lighting control circuit 268 is connected to the control microcomputer 279, and the lighting control circuit 268 controls the lighting of each light bulb 267 based on the instruction data of the control microcomputer 279, so that the control microcomputer 279 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the left and right colors. Can do. In this embodiment, the control microcomputer 279 outputs lighting control data in a predetermined format indicating the lighting and extinguishing of each bulb 267 and the state of repetition timing to the lighting control circuit 268, so that the lighting control circuit 268 Lighting and extinction that match the lighting control data are performed.

  The LCD driver 264, the lighting control circuit 268, the driver circuit 294, the input switches 262a to 262d, and the receiving unit 265 provided in the display unit 209 are provided from the lower surface 260b of the display substrate 260 as shown in FIG. The control cable 271 is connected to the control board 270 by a connection cable 271 that is led out and led out through an opening 283 formed in a substantially central portion of the base 280.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the control board 270 includes a connection port 272 for exchanging various signals with various devices and circuits provided in the display unit 209, and a calling lamp device 200. Is stored, and a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs various controls according to the program, a game information table shown in FIG. 35, and a game state history table shown in FIG. And nonvolatile microcomputer 276 storing various setting information (including various data files attached, corresponding slot machine role configuration and payout number data, etc.) transmitted from hall computer 140, and control microcomputer (MPU) 279 is used for storage in various control processes executed by the 279 and will be described later. A RAM 275 having various counters such as a game number counter and a display counter, a dip switch 277 for inputting initial settings in the calling lamp device 200, and a real-time clock (RTC) 273 for outputting time information and calendar information at that time And are provided.

  The control board 270 supplies an operation clock to the power supply circuit that supplies the control board 270 and the display unit 209 by converting the AC power supplied from the power source into a DC operation power supply, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 279. And a reset circuit for resetting the control microcomputer (MPU) 279.

  Further, the control board 270 of the present embodiment has a communication unit 269 for performing data communication with the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60, and a setting transmitted from the hall computer 140 through the communication unit 269. Information can be received (see FIG. 33).

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the control board 270 is provided with seven signal input units 278a to 278g and two signal input / output units 278L to 278R, and the signal input units 278a, 278b, 278c, 278d, 278e, 278f, 278g, BB signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, advantageous RT signal (RT2 signal) (some models do not output), door open signal , error signal output from the slot machine 1, respectively. Is input, and the signal input units 278a, 278b, 278c, 278d, 278e, 278f, 278g detect the input of each signal, and an output corresponding to the signal detection is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279. ing.

  In this embodiment, the advantageous RT signal output from the slot machine 1 is referred to as the RT2 signal, and hence the advantageous RT signal is hereinafter referred to as the RT2 signal.

  In addition, as the slot machine 1 used in the above-described embodiment as one model of the slot machine, when a setting change is performed, a model that externally outputs a setting change signal indicating that the setting change has been made. In some cases, setting change signals may be input in addition to the above signals, and the history of these setting changes may be stored and managed.

  Further, in this embodiment, only one error signal is provided, and when the input error signal and the payout error signal are output as in the slot machine 1 used in this embodiment, each signal is an error. It is input as a signal, and a signal is input when any error occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it input separately.

  On the other hand, the signal input / output units 278L and 278R are connected to the signal input / output units 278L and 278R of the adjacent call lamp device 200, and all the call lamp devices 200 installed on one surface of the game island are interconnected. These signal input / output units 278L and 278R perform running lighting in which the calling lamp devices 200 on one side of the game islands connected to each other are sequentially turned on when a bonus is generated. When the running signal is output from both of the signal input / output units 278L and 278R (that is, both the left and right) and the running signal is input from the adjacent call lamp device 200, the input of the running signal is detected. The output corresponding to the signal detection is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, so that the control manager In the running lighting process performed by the control unit (MPU) 279, all the light bulbs 267 are turned on once, and the signal input / output units 278L and 278R on the side opposite to the running signal input side (the input side when termination is set) are provided. A running signal is output.

  Further, a dip switch 277 is mounted on the control board 270 of the present embodiment. In the dip switch 277, settings for performing various settings on the calling lamp device 200 side or the hall computer 140 are set. In addition, it is possible to set the number of times of running and the termination setting in cooperation with each of the connected call lamp devices 200. In the present embodiment, since the hall computer 140 is connected to each call lamp device 200, these dip switches 277 are set to perform various settings on the hall computer 140 side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34, the RAM 275 of the present embodiment stores the latest game table in which the game contents and the like of the most recent games up to a predetermined number (30 in the present embodiment) from the previously executed game are stored. Has been.

  In this embodiment, the number of games stored in the most recent game table is 30 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games is determined by each model of the slot machine 1 to be used. What is necessary is just to determine according to a specification etc., and it is good also as a game number (for example, 15 games) smaller than 30 games, and good also as a game number (for example, 50 games) larger than 30 games.

  In the latest game table, in correspondence with the game number assigned to each game excluding the bonus period from the start of business, whether or not the RT2 signal is input in the game, the number of bets, the number of payouts, and the ART described later from the game Information on the base, replay occurrence rate, general combination occurrence rate, and assist time up to a predetermined number of games (number of games to be calculated) corresponding to the model of the corresponding slot machine 1 set on the related setting screen (see FIG. 44) The small role occurrence rate (AT small role occurrence rate) of the target small role is calculated and stored, and the game content up to the last 30 games excluding the bonus game, and the number of calculation target games with each game as the latest game The previous base value and replay occurrence rate can be grasped. That is, the base value, the replay occurrence rate, the general combination occurrence rate, and the AT small combination occurrence rate are not affected by the game being bonused.

  That is, in the slot machine 1 which is a gaming machine of the present invention, a plurality of types of winnings to which different game value levels are given can be generated, and the most recent game table constituting the monitoring means of the present invention is: By calculating the AT small combination occurrence rate, among the winnings generated in these slot machines 1, it is possible to monitor the occurrence of only the AT small combination that is the specific winning of the present invention. By carrying out the ART shift (start) determination based on the rate, it is possible to prevent the accuracy of the ART shift (start) determination from being reduced due to a prize other than the AT small part (specific winning). Yes.

  The EEPROM 276 of this embodiment stores a game information table shown in FIG. 35 and a game state history table shown in FIG. The game information table of this embodiment stores game information for three days including today, that is, today's data, previous day data, and previous day data. Of these data, today's data is also stored in the RAM 275 so that it can be read out at a higher speed than that read from the EEPROM 276. Data is also automatically updated.

  In the game information table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the game state at that time (current data only, normal, ART, BB, RB) and the total number of games based on the number of inputs of the medal IN signal are shown. , The number of games between bonuses that are the number of games from the previous big bonus or regular bonus (only today's data), the number of BB occurrences that are the cumulative number of big bonuses from the start of business, and the regular bonus from the start of business RB occurrence count, the total number of inserted medals from the start of business based on the medal IN signal, and the cumulative number of payout medals from the start of business based on the medal OUT signal. The total number of medals paid out, the difference between the total number of medals inserted and the total number of medals paid out, and the cumulative number of ARTs from the start of business The total number of ART occurrences, which is the number of births, the number of ARTs that are less than a predetermined number of ARTs from the start of business and the number of ARTs that have not been added, and the number of ARTs that have not been added, There is an additional number of ARTs that have continued to be added more than the predetermined number of ARTs. The number of ARTs with an additional number that is the cumulative number of ARTs generated, the total ART probability that is the total number of ARTs divided by the total number of games from the start of business, and no additionals. The ART probability with no addition obtained by dividing the number of ART occurrences by the total number of games from the start of business, the ART probability with addition by dividing the number of ART occurrences with addition by the total number of games from the start of business, and the number of ART occurrences with addition ART rush rate obtained by dividing the total number of ARTs and the average game during ART, which is the average number of games during the ART period The maximum number of games during ART that is the maximum number of games during the ART period, the minimum number of games during ART that is the minimum number of games during the ART period, and the average number of medals paid out during the ART period The average number of payouts during ART, the maximum number of payouts during ART that is the maximum number of medals paid out during the ART period, and the minimum number during the ART period that is the minimum number of medals paid out during the ART period The number of payouts, the average number of medals acquired by the player during the ART period, the average number of acquired medals during ART, the maximum number of medals acquired by the player during the ART period, and the maximum number of acquired medals during ART. The minimum number of medals acquired by the player during the ART period, which is the minimum number of medals, is specified in the one-unit determination process (see FIG. 57) described later. 1-unit average ART number that is the average number of ARTs that occurred during each 1-unit period, 1-unit maximum ART number that is the maximum number of ARTs that occurred during 1-unit period, and ART that occurred during 1-unit period 1 unit minimum ART number which is the minimum number of times, 1 unit average acquisition number which is the average of the number of medals obtained by the player in one unit period, and the average number of medals paid out in one unit period 1 unit average payout number is stored, and these pieces of game information are input related processing, payout related processing, ART determination processing, and game state identification, which will be described later when various signals are input to the signal input units 278a to 278g. The latest information is sequentially updated by processing or the like.

  In this embodiment, the game information of the items shown in FIG. 35 is tabulated and calculated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game information other than these items is tabulated and calculated. Anyway.

  In addition, the average number of games during ART, the average number of payouts during ART, and the average number of acquisitions during ART are determined when the end of ART is determined, It is calculated and updated based on the acquired number, the value already stored, and the total number of ARTs.

  Further, the minimum number of games and the maximum number of games during ART, the maximum number of acquired games and the minimum number of acquired games during ART are determined from the corresponding values of today's data stored in the game information table when the end of ART is determined. Are larger (maximum) or smaller (minimum), and are updated to the new value when larger or smaller.

  In addition, each data of 1-unit average ART number, 1-unit average acquisition number, 1-unit average payout number is determined when the start of one unit is newly determined and the end of the previous one unit is confirmed. Calculated and updated based on the number of ARTs, the number of acquired sheets and the number of payouts in the period of one unit before the determination is made, and the average number of ARTs, the average number of acquired sheets, the average number of payouts and the number of one unit stored in advance. Is done.

  In addition, the 1-unit maximum ART count and the 1-unit minimum ART count are the current data stored in the game information table when the start of one unit is newly determined and the end of the previous one unit is confirmed. It is compared whether it is larger (maximum) or smaller (minimum) than the corresponding value, and if it is larger or smaller, it is updated to the new value.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36, the game state history table of the present embodiment stores four types of game state histories (data by state) of today, the previous day, the day before the previous day, and each day. In addition, the gaming state (normal: normal gaming state, BB: big bonus, RB: regular bonus, ART: assist replay time) and the number of occurrences (n), the occurrence time of the gaming state, and one unit to which the gaming state belongs The unit number, the total number of games at the time of the gaming state, the number of games during the gaming state, the total number of medals at the time of the gaming state, and the number of medals inserted during the gaming state And the total number of paid-out medals at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of paid-out medals during the gaming state, and the difference medal number during the gaming state (number of paid-out medals−number of inserted medals). By state Chromatography data (game state history) is adapted to be stored in the order generated in the corresponding slot machine 1.

  As described above, the gaming state history table can grasp the occurrence state of all the gaming states generated in the corresponding slot machine 1, the number of games executed in each gaming state, and the number of difference medals in the gaming state. By summing the duration of one unit, the type of gaming state included in one unit, the occurrence status of one unit, the number of payout medals and the number of difference medals in each gaming state included in the one unit, The number of payout medals and the number of difference medals per unit (the number of acquired medals; TY) and the average thereof can be grasped, and the number of unit bonuses and the average thereof can be grasped from the number of bonuses contained in one unit, and further included in one unit. From the number of ARTs, it is possible to grasp the 1-unit average ART count, the 1-unit maximum ART count, and the 1-unit minimum ART count.

  In other words, in the gaming state history table of the present embodiment, it is determined as one unit (one unit period) determined (specified) in one unit determination processing (to be described later) serving as one unit period specifying means, that is, one unit. The total number of paid-out medals and the total number of difference medals that are the difference between the number of wagers and the number of game media granted in the state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored can be totaled (unit TY). It is like that.

  In the gaming state history table of the present embodiment, the ART generated during one unit (one unit period) specified as one unit by storing the same unit number in the one-unit determination process described later, State-specific data serving as occurrence status specifying information that can specify the occurrence status of a bonus (special winning combination) is stored, and the number of ARTs generated during one unit (one unit period) and one unit (one unit period) It is possible to count the number of occurrences of various bonuses (special winning combination) that occurred inside.

  This gaming state history table is initialized by performing a gaming state history table initialization process (not shown) in the starting process performed when the calling lamp device 200 is started.

  In the game state history table initialization process of this embodiment, first, a game state history carry-over process is performed.

  Specifically, in this carry-over process, it is confirmed whether or not the date output from the RTC 273 has been changed. If it has been changed, the date is stored as the carry-over date of the gaming state history, and After the data is changed to the previous day and the previous day's data is changed to the day before, the gaming state history (data classified by state) stored as today's data is all reset and the process is terminated.

  Next, the collecting unit 50 used in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 33, the collecting unit 50 includes one collecting unit 50 for four slot machines 1 (game machines). Are arranged, and each signal output from each of the four slot machines 1 is input to one collecting unit 50, and the various game information of each slot machine 1 is totaled in the same manner as the calling lamp device 200, By transmitting table game information data including various game information related to each slot machine 1 and game state history data including game state history (data by state) to the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60, The hall computer 140 can centrally manage game information and game state history of each slot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, a mode in which the relay unit 60 is used to enable installation of a large number of collecting units 50 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it connect the collection unit 50 and the hall computer 140 directly, without going through.

  Here, the configuration of the collection unit 50 used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37A. The collection unit 50 has four ports from the first port 581 to the fourth port 584. The slot machines 1 are connected to the four ports 581 to 584, respectively, so that four slot machines 1 can be connected to one collection unit 50.

  Each of these four ports 581 to 584 is connected to a control microcomputer (MPU) 579 for controlling the operation of the collection unit 50, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 inputs a signal to each port 581 to 584. The presence or absence can be detected.

  The control microcomputer (MPU) 579 includes a program for performing various controls executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579, a unit ID of the collection unit 50, and a slot machine 1 connected to the ports 581 to 584. 39, the game information table shown in FIG. 39, the game state history table shown in FIG. 40, various setting information for each slot machine 1 transmitted from the hall computer 140, etc. (of the slot machine 1 corresponding to each port) Non-volatile EEPROM 576 in which the composition of the combination, the number of payouts and the setting data for determining the start and end of ART are stored, and the memory in various control processes executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 As shown in FIG. 38, various counters such as a game number counter (not shown) are used. A RAM 575 storing the latest game table, a real-time clock (RTC) 573 that outputs time information and calendar information at that time, and a communication unit 569 for performing data communication with the relay unit 60 are connected. The communication unit 569 transmits the above-mentioned table game information data and game state history data having the configuration of each transmission data string shown in FIG.

Each port 581 to 584 is provided with seven signal input portions 581a to 581g as illustrated in the port 581 in FIG. 37A, and the signal input portions 581a, 581b, 581c, 581d, BB signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RT2 signal (some models do not output), door open signal , and error signal are input to 581e, 581f, and 581g, respectively. The signal input units 581 a, 581 b, 581 c, 581 d, 281 e, 581 f, 581 g detect the input of each signal, and output corresponding to the signal detection is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 579.

  In addition, as the slot machine 1 used in the above-described embodiment as one model of the slot machine, when a setting change is performed, a model that externally outputs a setting change signal indicating that the setting change has been made. In some cases, setting change signals may be input in addition to the above signals, and the presence or absence of these setting changes may be transmitted to the management computer 140.

  Further, in this embodiment, only one error signal is provided, and when the input error signal and the payout error signal are output as in the slot machine 1 used in this embodiment, each signal is an error. It is input as a signal, and a signal is input when any error occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each error may be input individually and the occurrence of each error may be individually transmitted to the management computer 140.

  Also, in the most recent game table provided in the RAM 575 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, for each game number except for the bonus period from the start of business for each unit number of each connected slot machine 1. Corresponding to the given game number, the presence or absence of input of RT2 signal in the game, the number of bets, the number of payouts, and the corresponding slot machine 1 set on the ART related setting screen (see FIG. 44) described later from the game The base up to a predetermined number of games (number of games to be calculated) corresponding to the model of the model, the replay occurrence rate, the general role occurrence rate, and the small role occurrence rate (AT small role occurrence rate) of the notification target small role at the assist time are calculated. The contents of the game up to the last 30 games excluding the bonus game and the number of games up to the number of games to be calculated with each game as the latest game are stored. The value and replay incidence, so that can be grasped for each slot machine each being connected. That is, the base value, the replay occurrence rate, the general combination occurrence rate, and the AT small combination occurrence rate are not affected by the game being bonused.

  That is, in the slot machine 1 which is a gaming machine of the present invention, a plurality of types of winnings to which different game value levels are given can be generated, and the most recent game table constituting the monitoring means of the present invention is: By calculating the AT small combination occurrence rate, among the winnings generated in these slot machines 1, it is possible to monitor the occurrence of only the AT small combination that is the specific winning of the present invention. By carrying out the ART shift (start) determination based on the rate, it is possible to prevent the accuracy of the ART shift (start) determination from being reduced due to a prize other than the AT small part (specific winning). Yes.

  In this embodiment, the number of games stored in the most recent game table is 30 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games is determined by each model of the slot machine 1 to be used. What is necessary is just to determine according to a specification etc., and it is good also as a game number (for example, 15 games) smaller than 30 games, and good also as a game number (for example, 50 games) larger than 30 games.

  In addition, in the EEPROM 576 of this embodiment, the same game information (today) as the game information aggregated in the game information table stored in the calling lamp device 200 provided corresponding to the connected slot machine 1 A game information table shown in FIG. 39 for storing data (only data) for each slot machine 1 is stored.

  In the game information table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the game information table is associated with the unit number of each connected slot machine 1 in the same manner as the game information table stored in the call lamp device 200 described above. The gaming state at that time, the number of RB occurrences that are the cumulative number of occurrences of regular bonuses from the start of business, the total number of inserted medals that are the cumulative number of medals from the start of business based on the medal IN signal, Based on the medal OUT signal, the total number of paid-out medals from the start of business, the difference between the total number of inserted medals and the total number of paid-out medals, and the ART from the start of business The total number of ART occurrences, which is the total number of occurrences, and the total number of ART occurrences that are less than a predetermined number of ARTs from the start of business and for which there is no additional number of games The number of ARTs without rides, the number of ARTs with extras that is the cumulative number of ARTs that have been added more than the predetermined number of ARTs from the start of business, and the total number of ARTs generated from the start of business. The total ART probability divided by the number of games and the non-added ART occurrence frequency divided by the total number of games from the start of business divided by the total number of games from the start of business and the extra ART probability with the addition divided by the total number of games from the start of business. ART probability with addition, ART entry rate with addition obtained by dividing the number of ART occurrence with addition by the total number of ARTs, average number of games during ART, which is the average number of games during ART period, and during ART period Maximum number of games during ART, which is the maximum number of games, and minimum number of games during ART, which is the minimum number of games during the ART period The average number of payouts during ART, which is the average number of medals paid out during the ART period, the maximum number of payouts during ART, which is the maximum number of medals paid out during the ART period, and the payment during the ART period The minimum number of payouts during ART, which is the minimum number of medals issued, the average number of coins acquired during ART that is the average of the number of medals acquired by the player during the ART period, and the medal earned by the player during the ART period The maximum number acquired in ART, which is the maximum number, the minimum number acquired in ART, which is the minimum number of medals acquired by the player during the ART period, and 1 unit determination processing (see FIG. 57) described later. 1 unit average ART number that is the average number of ARTs that occurred during each 1 unit period and 1 unit number that is the maximum number of ARTs that occurred during a unit period The maximum number of ARTs, the minimum number of ARTs generated during one unit period, the minimum number of ART units, the average number of medals obtained by the player during one unit period, 1 unit average payout number, which is the average of the number of medals paid out during the unit period, is stored, and these game information is input related processing (to be described later) executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the call lamp device 200. , Payout-related processing, latest game table update processing, ART determination processing, gaming state identification processing, and processing similar to 1 unit determination processing are controlled for each port by inputting various signals to each port 581 to 584 By being executed by (MPU) 579, it is sequentially updated to the latest information.

  In this embodiment, the game information of the items shown in FIG. 39 is tabulated and calculated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game information other than these items is tabulated and calculated. Anyway.

  Further, in the EEPROM 576 of this embodiment, the game managed in the above-described gaming state history table (see FIG. 36) stored in the calling lamp device 200 provided corresponding to the connected slot machine 1. A gaming state history table shown in FIG. 40 for storing the same gaming state history information (only today's data) as the state history for each slot machine 1 is stored.

  In the gaming state history table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, in the same manner as the gaming state history table stored in the call lamp device 200 described above, the serial number of each connected slot machine 1 is indicated. Correspondingly, the gaming state (normal: normal gaming state, BB: big bonus, RB: regular bonus, ART: assist replay time) and the number of occurrences (n), the occurrence time of the gaming state, and the gaming state belong to 1 The unit number of the unit, the total number of games at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of games during the period of the gaming state, the total number of inserted medals at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, and the number of insertions during the period of the gaming state The number of medals, the total number of paid-out medals at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of paid-out medals during the gaming state, and the difference medal number (paid-out medals during the gaming state) - a closing medal number), the state-specific data consisting of (game state history) is adapted to be stored in the order generated in the individual slot machine 1.

  Similar to the call lamp device 200, this gaming state history table is a gaming state (not shown) in an initialization process performed in response to reception of a connection confirmation request transmitted from the hall computer 140 when the hall computer 140 is activated. Initialization (reset and storage of initial game state and initial value) is performed by performing processing similar to the history table initialization processing.

  As described above, the transmission data string 1 (see FIG. 37 (b)), which is table game information data including each game information tabulated in the game information table, the table number, and the unit ID of the collection unit 50, is provided. By being transmitted in response to inquiries from the hall computer 140 every predetermined time (for example, every 10 seconds), in the hall computer 140, game information for each slot machine 1 is stored in a game information table (see FIG. 42) described later. ).

  When the gaming state shifts to the big bonus, the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the base game information data is transmitted to the hall computer 140 at the time of the transition without being based on an inquiry from the hall computer 140. The

  Similarly, the transmission data string 2 (FIG. 37 (b) shown in FIG. 37 (b), which is gaming state history data including state-specific data (gaming state history) determined in the gaming state history table, unit number, and unit ID of the collecting unit 50 )) Is based on the fact that the state data before the change is determined by adding the state data of the new game state to the game state history table as the game state of the slot machine 1 changes. By being transmitted to the hall computer 140, in the hall computer 140, the gaming state history (data by state) for each slot machine 1 is managed in a table-specific gaming state history table (FIG. 43) to be described later. It is like that.

  Next, the hall computer 140 used in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the hall computer 140 is connected to the data bus 141 for transmitting and receiving data inside the computer in response to the reception of the table game information data. The game information table to be described later will be updated later, and the CPU 142 for performing display processing and setting information transmission processing for displaying the game information of each slot machine 1, RAM 143 used as work memory, time information and calendar information, etc. A real-time clock (RTC) 144 that outputs, a storage device 145 composed of a magnetic disk or a magneto-optical disk, selection acceptance of a model type (judgment condition type) on an ART-related setting screen described later, and specification of one unit on a one-unit-related setting screen Enter the number of 1-unit continuation determination games used for 59, an input device 146 such as a keyboard and a mouse, a display device 147 for displaying and outputting a table-specific game information screen shown in FIG. 59, a printer 148 for printing and outputting the table-specific game information screen, etc. It is a normal computer to which a communication unit 149 that performs data communication with the collection unit 50 via the unit 60 and data communication with each calling lamp device 200 is connected.

  Further, in the storage device 145, in addition to processing programs for executing various processings executed by the hall computer 140, as shown in FIG. 1 model name, unit ID of the collecting unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1, unit ID of the calling lamp device 200 connected to the slot machine 1, start and end of ART in the slot machine 1 of the model It is associated with the game information table of today, in which various game information of today is updated and stored, such as the type ID of the determination condition for making this determination, the game state at that time and the total number of inserted medals, and the unit number of each slot machine 1 The game information table for the previous day in which various game information of the previous day is stored and managed, and the unit number of each slot machine 1 In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, various game information tables such as the game information table of the day before last, in which various game information of the day before last is stored and managed, and as shown in FIG. In the slot machine 1, the game state history generated on that day is sequentially stored and managed by the table-specific game state history table (today), and the game state history of the previous day and the day before the next is sequentially stored and managed. A table (previous day), a table-specific gaming state history table (previous day), a setting-specific winning probability data for each model of the slot machine 1, and the like are stored.

  In this game information table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the model name of the slot machine 1 and the collection connected to the slot machine 1 are associated with the serial number of each slot machine 1. The unit ID of the unit 50, the unit ID of the calling lamp device 200 connected to the slot machine 1, the type ID of the determination condition for determining the start and end of ART, the gaming state at that time, The number of inserted medals, the total number of paid-out medals, the number of difference medals, the total number of games, the number of BB occurrences, the number of RB occurrences, the total number of ART occurrences, the number of ART occurrences without addition, and the number of ART occurrences with addition , Total ART probability, ART probability without addition, ART probability with addition, ART entry rate with addition, average number of games during ART, and maximum number of ART during ART Number of games, minimum number of games during ART, average number of payouts during ART, maximum number of payouts during ART, minimum number of payouts during ART, average number of acquisitions during ART, and maximum number of acquisitions during ART And the minimum number of acquisitions during ART, 1 unit average ART number, 1 unit maximum ART number, 1 unit minimum ART number, 1 unit average acquisition number, 1 unit average payout number, and big from the start of business. The number of games until the first occurrence of bonus or regular bonus and the number of games between bonuses, which are the number of games during the occurrence of each big bonus or regular bonus, are stored and managed. In response to the reception of the table game information data shown in FIG. 37 (b) transmitted from the collection unit 50, the table number included in the received table game information data Each corresponding game information is updated to the data of each game information included in the table game information data (transmission data string 1), so that the latest game information of the day is centrally managed in the game information table today. The game information of each slot machine 1 managed in the game information table today is displayed and output on the stand-by game information screen of FIG.

  Also, in the game state history table for each vehicle of the present day, the previous day, and the day before the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the game state (normal; normal game) is associated with the machine number of each slot machine 1. State, BB: big bonus, RB: regular bonus, ART: assist replay time) and the number of occurrences (n), the occurrence time of the gaming state, the unit number of the unit to which the gaming state belongs, and the occurrence of the gaming state The total number of games at the time, the number of games during the gaming state, the total number of inserted medals at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of inserted medals during the period of the gaming state, and the time of occurrence of the gaming state State-specific data (gaming state history) comprising the total number of paid-out medals, the number of paid-out medals during the gaming state, and the difference medal number during the gaming state (number of paid-out medals−number of inserted medals) ,each These lot-by-state data (game state history) are stored and managed in the order of occurrence in the lot machine 1, and the game state shown in FIG. In response to the reception of the history data (transmission data string 2), it is additionally stored as the latest state-specific data (game state history) corresponding to the machine number included in the received gaming state history data. The gaming state history is centrally managed in the stand-by gaming state history table, and is included in one unit occurrence status and one unit based on the gaming state history of each slot machine 1 managed in the stand-by gaming state history table. 49, the number of medals obtained by the player in one unit, and the like are calculated and displayed on the stand-by game information screen of FIG.

  Note that when the date is changed and the hall computer 140 is activated, the table-by-table game state history table data is carried over to the table-by-day game state history table for the previous day, Carry-over processing is performed so that the table-specific gaming state history table is carried over to the table-by-day gaming state history table.

  In addition, in the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation, the ART related setting screen shown in FIG. 44 is displayed, and ART transition (start) determination in each call lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 is performed. The conditions for determining whether or not to end can be set for each slot machine 1 in accordance with the model (specification) of the slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the ART-related setting screen of this embodiment includes an item “setting target table” for selecting and specifying the slot machine 1 corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set, An item of “determination condition type” for selecting the type ID of the determination condition is provided.

  The item of “setting object stand” in this ART related setting screen is provided with a check box and a selection window for each selection menu of “island unit” and “unit unit” that can be exclusively selected. By selecting the “unit” and inputting the island number, it is possible to designate the slot machine 1 corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set for each “island unit”, and the slot machine 1 By designating the unit number, the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 corresponding to one slot machine 1 can be designated as the setting target.

  In addition, in the item of “judgment condition type”, one selection window is provided, and in this selection window, the type ID to which the slot machine corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 to be set and the collection unit 50 corresponds is set. You can select it from the pop-up window.

  Here, determination condition types that can be selected in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

  In the present embodiment, the determination condition types are roughly divided into T1 to T5 depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, and subclasses 1 to 24 are classified based on the specifications for each type of T1 to T5. Judgment condition types are provided for each type.

  First, the major classifications T1 to T5 will be described. Type 1 (T1) is the same type as the above-described slot machine 1 described in detail in the present embodiment, and it is advantageous for the migrated advantageous RT (advantageous for the player). RT, hereinafter simply referred to as RT) does not end with the specified number of games (the end condition does not include the default number of games) and does not transition to RT upon completion of the bonus (the end of the bonus is set as the RT start condition) (Does not include) The slot machine of the type corresponds, and Type 2 (T2) does not shift to RT at the end of the bonus as in Type 1 (RT start condition does not include bonus end) Corresponds to the model that ends with the specified number of games (including the default number of games in the end condition), and Type 3 (T3) does not end the transitioned RT with the specified number of games like Type 1. (End game does not include the default number of games), but transitions to RT only at the end of the bonus (applies to the start condition of RT includes the end of the bonus) corresponds to the slot machine type, type 4 (T4) is transferred This corresponds to a slot machine of a model in which the RT ends with the specified number of games (including the default number of games as the end condition) and shifts to RT only when the bonus ends (including the end of the bonus as the RT start condition) In Type 5 (T5), the transition is made to the replay time not by the end of the bonus but by the internal winning of the bonus, and RT continues until the winning bonus is won, but it is uncertain whether or not the assist is given at the replay time. If the assist is given and the medal payout rate exceeds 1, the medal payout rate is 1 or less if the assist is not given. Kind of slot machine are true.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing determination condition types that can be selected for a slot machine of a model corresponding to type 1. FIG.

  In type 1, as shown in FIG. 46, 18 types of determination condition types from T1-1 to T1-18 are provided so as to be selectable.

  In FIG. 46 to FIG. 50, “O” indicates that the target specification is provided, and “X” indicates that the target specification is provided. When “−” is written, it is uncertain whether or not the target specification is provided, and this indicates that the specification is irrelevant to the determination.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT, so that a notification subject small role (AT small role) If it is a type that exists, the type T1-1 may be selected.

  When this type T1-1 is selected, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and before and after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table If the N game occurrence rate of the N game is equal to or greater than the probability P, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART) and that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state as an end condition. Determine the end of.

  The value of N game and the value of probability P may be set based on the occurrence probability of AT small roles in the target model. For example, in 10 games that are N games, 8 or more AT small roles are generated. If it is (probability P = 80% or more), it may be determined to be a start.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the ART state is being stored is stored to determine whether the input of the RT2 signal corresponds to the start of RT or the end of RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to these determinations, for example, as for the start of ART, for example, an end regarding the occurrence status of a general winning combination A condition may be provided to determine that the input RT2 signal is the end of RT when the end condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, as an end condition, for example, if there are only 3 or less general winning combinations in 5 games that are N games (probability P = 60% or less), it may be determined to end.

  It is preferable to use the general winning combination occurrence rate instead of the AT small combination occurrence rate as the target condition for the end condition because it is possible to quickly determine the end. As with the time, it may be the AT small part occurrence rate. The N game and the probability Q may be values according to the specifications of the target model.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT. ) Is a type that does not exist (a type that does not have a small role in which the winning probability is improved in ART and is a type in which an operation mode that avoids falling (end of RT) is notified) is type T1- 2 may be selected.

  When this type T1-2 is selected, the determination based on the AT small combination occurrence rate is impossible, so the period (number of games) from when the start RT2 signal is input to when the end RT2 signal is input However, if the winning probability of the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling condition (RT termination condition) is satisfied (for example, the falling combination (display mode serving as the RT termination condition)) is 1 / 5.8, 6 games The number of games corresponding to the probability that the fall condition is satisfied after the previous RT2 signal has been input has passed without the next RT2 signal being input, and the start of ART is determined. The end of the ART may be set as an end condition when the RT2 signal is input during the ART for which the start is determined, as in the case of T1-1.

  In the case of the type T1-2, as in the case of the type T1-1, as in the case of the start of the ART, for example, an end condition regarding the occurrence state of the general winning combination is provided and the end condition is satisfied. In addition, it may be determined that the input RT2 signal is the end of RT.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is a notification small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated by the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role can be identified from the number of payout medals. In some cases, the type T1-3 may be selected.

  When this type T1-3 is selected, as with T1-1, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small part occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and calculated in the most recent game table. If the occurrence rate of the AT small combination in the N game before and after the input of the RT2 signal is greater than or equal to the probability P, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of the ART (the start of the ART). The end of ART is determined based on the end condition that a prize has been won.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and when there is a notification small role (AT small role) and the type in which a fallable combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, type T1-4 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T1-4 is selected, as with T1-1, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small part occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and calculated in the most recent game table. If the occurrence rate of AT game in N games before and after the input of the RT2 signal is greater than or equal to the probability P, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART), and the end of the ART is determined for the end. Later, the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is less than the probability Q. Note that the end of ART may be determined on the condition that the AT small combination occurrence rate is equal to or less than the probability Q instead of the general combination occurrence rate.

  Specifically, as an end condition, for example, if there are only 3 or less general winning combinations in 5 games that are N games (probability P = 60% or less), it may be determined to end. The N game and the probability Q may be values that match the specifications of the target model.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). Select the type T1-5 if the RT2 signal is output only once, and there is no informing small part (AT small part) but it is a type that can identify the falling part from the number of medals paid out. Just do it.

  When this type T1-5 is selected, the determination based on the AT small combination occurrence rate is impossible as with the type T1-2, so the period from when the start RT2 signal is input until the falling combination wins (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the probability of winning a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the previous RT2 signal is input The start of the ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination has elapsed without winning the falling combination. On the other hand, regarding the end of ART, the end of ART is determined on the condition that the winning of a fallen combination has been received from the number of payout medals in the ART state, as in the case of type T1-3.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no informing small part (AT small part) and the type in which a falling combination cannot be identified from the number of payout medals, type T1-6 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T1-6 is selected, since the determination based on the AT small combination occurrence rate is impossible as in the case of type T1-2, the period from when the start RT2 signal is input until the falling combination wins (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the probability of winning a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the previous RT2 signal is input The start of the ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination has elapsed without winning the falling combination. On the other hand, regarding the end of ART, as in the case of type T1-4, after determining the start of the ART, the end of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q.

  The model to be set is a model that corresponds to Type 1 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify the promoted role promoted to RT from the number of payout medals, and at the end of RT In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output and there is a type to which the notification subject small combination (AT small combination) exists (the type in which the RT2 signal is output only at the end of the RT), the type T1-7 may be selected. .

  When this type T1-7 is selected, the period (number of games) from the game in which it is detected that the promotion combination is won based on the number of payout medals until the end RT2 signal is input (game number) wins the fall combination. More than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning (for example, if the winning probability of the falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the probability of winning the falling role after the promotion role winning occurs. The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of corresponding games has passed without the input of the RT2 signal, and the end condition is determined that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined. Determine the end of.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1, does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, and cannot promote the promotion role to be promoted to RT from the number of paid-out medals. If it is a type that outputs the RT2 signal at the time and there is a notification minor (AT minor) (the type that outputs the RT2 signal only at the end of RT), the type T1-8 is selected. good.

  When this type T1-8 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of N games calculated in the most recent game table is greater than or equal to the probability P, and the N game general role occurrence rate is greater than or equal to the probability R. The start of the ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state in which the start is determined.

  These N game values, probabilities P, and probability R values may be set based on the occurrence probability of an AT small combination, the occurrence probability of a general winning combination, or the like in the target model. For example, out of 10 games that are N games There are 5 or more games in AT (probability P = 50% or more), and there are 8 games or more in the N-game 10 games (probability P = 80% or more). If there is, it may be judged that it is a start.

  Note that the value of the N game may be different between the AT small combination occurrence rate and the general combination occurrence rate. The N game, the probability Q, and the probability R may be values according to the specifications of the target model.

  The model to be set is a model that corresponds to Type 1 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify the promoted role promoted to RT from the number of payout medals, and at the end of RT In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output and there is no notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T1-9 may be selected.

  When this type T1-9 is selected, as in the case of type T1-7, the period from the game in which it is detected that there is a promotion winning combination based on the number of payout medals until the end RT2 signal is input (the number of games) ) Is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role (for example, if the probability of winning a fallen role is 1 / 5.8, it is equal to or greater than 6 games). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination has passed without the input of the RT2 signal, and the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined The end of ART is determined using the above as an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT and cannot recognize the promotion role to be promoted to RT from the number of paid-out medals, and at the end of RT In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output and there is no notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T1-10 may be selected.

  When this type T1-10 is selected, the period (number of games) from when the N-game general combination occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or higher than the probability R until the end RT2 signal is input ) Is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or more than 6 games). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination has passed without the input of the RT2 signal, and the RT2 signal is displayed during the ART state where the start is determined. The termination of the ART is determined with the termination condition being input.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and is promoted to RT. If the promotion combination and the fallen combination are types that can be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and the type includes a notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T1-11 may be selected.

  When this type T1-11 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the game in which it is detected from the number of paid-out medals that a promotion combination has been won has a probability P or more. As a starting condition, when the occurrence rate of the AT small part in the N game is equal to or higher than the probability P, it is determined that the time when the immediately preceding promoted part was won is the starting point, and there was a prize for the promoted part The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that there was a winning combination of a falling role later. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from the promotion winning combination to the falling winning combination, it is not determined as an ART.

  That is, specifically, in the case of type T1-11, when the promotion combination is won, the fact that the promotion combination has been won is stored, and the winning of the fall combination is not detected. When the RT2 signal is input, it is determined that the start of the ART is stored if it is stored that the promotion role has been won before that time, and the time at which the promotion role has been received is determined as the start time of the ART. On the other hand, when a winning combination of a falling combination is detected before the input of the RT2 signal, the memory of the winning combination of the promotion combination is erased without determining that the ART has started.

  The model to be set is a model that corresponds to Type 1 and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify a promoted combination from the number of paid-out medals and has a notification small role (AT small role), type T1-12 may be selected.

  When this type T1-12 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or higher than the probability P, and the general role occurrence rate of the N game is equal to or higher than the probability R. The start of the ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the winning of the fallen role is received during the ART state in which the start is determined. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to the winning of the falling combination, it is not determined as ART.

  That is, specifically, in the case of type T1-12, the fact that the start condition that the AT small combination occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability P and the general combination occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability R is stored. When the RT2 signal is input without detecting the winning of a falling combination, if it is stored that the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the ART is started, and the time when the start condition is satisfied is determined to be the start of the ART. On the other hand, if the winning of the falling combination is detected before the input of the RT2 signal, the memory indicating that the start condition is satisfied is erased without determining that the ART has started.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify a fallen combination from the number of medals to be paid out, and is a type in which there is a notification subject small role (AT small role), type T1-13 can be selected. good.

  When this type T1-13 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the game in which it is detected from the number of payout medals that the promotion combination has been won is a probability P or more. As a starting condition, when the occurrence rate of the AT small part in the N game is equal to or higher than the probability P, it is determined that the time when the immediately preceding promoted part was won is the starting point, and there was a prize for the promoted part Later, the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  Specifically, in the case of the type T1-13, when the promotion combination is won, the fact that the promotion combination has been won is stored, and the general combination occurrence rate in the N game is determined. When the RT2 signal is input without a probability Q or less, it is determined that the ART has started if it is recorded that the promotion role has been won before that, and the time when the promotion role has been won is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART start time is reached, and the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is less than the probability Q before the input of the RT2 signal, the promotion combination has been won without determining the ART. Erase memory.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period. When the type is a type in which a combination cannot be identified from the number of payout medals and there is a notification small combination (AT small combination), the type T1-14 may be selected.

  When this type T1-14 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or higher than the probability P, and the N combination general character occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability R. The start of ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and thereafter the end of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  Specifically, in the case of type T1-14, the fact that the start condition that the AT small combination occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability P and the general combination occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability R is stored. When the RT2 signal is input without satisfying the end condition (general combination occurrence rate during N game is equal to or less than the probability Q), if it is stored that the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the ART is started, The point in time when the start condition is satisfied is determined as the ART start point. On the other hand, if the end condition (the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is less than the probability Q) is satisfied before the input of the RT2 signal, it is determined as ART. Without deleting the memory indicating that the start condition is satisfied.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and is promoted to RT. If the promotion combination and the fallen combination are types that can be identified from the number of payout medals and there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination), the type T1-15 may be selected.

  When this type T1-15 is selected, the period (number of games) from the detection of the promotion medal winning to the detection of the falling role winning from the number of paid-out medals is the number of games falling. More than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the winning combination (for example, if the winning probability of the falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning has not been won for the falling role, and the start time is determined as the start time of the promotion role, and the start is determined After that, the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the winning of the falling role is received. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from the promotion winning combination to the falling winning combination, it is not determined as an ART.

  Specifically, in the case of the type T1-15, when the promotion combination is won, the fact that the promotion combination is won is stored, and the winning of the falling combination is not detected. When the RT2 signal is input, it is determined that the start of the ART is stored if it is stored that the promotion role has been won before that time, and the time at which the promotion role has been received is determined as the start time of the ART. On the other hand, if a winning combination of a fallen combination is detected before the input of the RT2 signal, the memory indicating that the promotion combination has been won is erased without determining that it is an ART.

  The model to be set is a model that corresponds to Type 1 and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify a promoted combination from the number of paid-out medals, and does not have a notification target small combination (AT small combination), type T1-16 may be selected.

  When this type T1-16 is selected, the period from when the N-game general combination occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R to when it is detected that there has been a winning combination of a falling combination (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or more than 6 games). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination after having become R or more has passed without winning the falling combination, and falls during the ART state where the start is determined The end of ART is determined on the condition that winning a winning combination is an end condition. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to the winning of the falling combination, it is not determined as ART.

  That is, specifically, in the case of type T1-16, it is memorized that the occurrence rate of the general combination of the N game is equal to or higher than the probability R, and the RT2 signal is input without detecting the winning of the falling combination. If it is stored that the occurrence rate of the general combination is equal to or greater than the probability R, it is determined that the ART is started, and the time when the occurrence rate of the general combination is equal to or greater than the probability R is determined as the start time of the ART. On the other hand, when a winning combination of a falling combination is detected before the input of the RT2 signal, the memory that the general combination occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability R is erased without determining that it is ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1 and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify a fallen combination from the number of paid-out medals and does not have a notification subject small role (AT small role), type T1-17 may be selected.

  When this type T1-17 is selected, the period from the game in which it is detected that the promotion combination is won based on the number of paid-out medals until the general combination occurrence rate in the N game, which is the ending condition, becomes less than the probability Q (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role (for example, if the probability of winning a fallen role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). After that, the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role has passed without the general role occurrence rate in N games having dropped below the probability Q, and the start condition of the ART is determined. The time at which a winning occurs is determined as the start time, and after the start is determined, the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is less than the probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from the winning of the promoted combination until the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q, it is not determined as an ART.

  That is, specifically, in the case of type T1-17, if there is a prize for the promotion role, the fact that the promotion role has been won is stored, and the winning of the fall role is not detected. When the RT2 signal is input, it is determined that the start of the ART is stored if it is stored that the promotion role has been won before that time, and the time at which the promotion role has been received is determined as the start time of the ART. On the other hand, if the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q before the input of the RT2 signal, the memory indicating that the promotion combination has been won is deleted without determining the ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 1, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period, and the promotion role also falls If the combination is a type that cannot be identified from the number of payout medals and does not have a notification target small combination (AT small combination), the type T1-18 may be selected.

  When this type T1-18 is selected, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game, which is the ending condition, is a probability from the time when the N combination general occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R. The period until the Q or less (number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling role (for example, if the winning probability of a falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or greater than 6). The number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role after the N-game general role occurrence rate is equal to or greater than the probability R has elapsed without the general role occurrence rate during the N game falling below the probability Q The start of ART is determined as a condition, and the time when the occurrence rate of the general combination becomes equal to or higher than the probability R is determined as the start time. After the determination is made, the occurrence rate of the general combination during the N game becomes the probability Q or less. As an end condition To determine the end. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the start condition to the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  That is, specifically, in the case of type T1-18, it is stored that the occurrence rate of the general combination of the N game is equal to or higher than the probability R, and the generation rate of the general combination of the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q. If the RT2 signal is input without any memorizing that the occurrence rate of the general combination is equal to or greater than the probability R, it is determined that the ART has started, and the occurrence rate of the general combination is equal to or greater than the probability R. Is determined to be the start time of ART, and if the occurrence rate of the general combination of the N game is less than the probability Q before the input of the RT2 signal, the occurrence rate of the general combination is not less than the probability R without determining the ART. Erase the memory of what happened.

  In this embodiment, for the types T1-11 to T1-18, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART. Thus, it is possible to confirm that the start and end judgments were correct depending on whether or not the RT2 signal is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the model that does not output these RT2 signals can also be used. , Types T1-11 to T1-18 are set, and even if there is no RT2 signal input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the start and end of the ART is determined by determining as an ART. It is possible to judge. Therefore, for the types T1-11 to T1-18 in FIG.

  In FIG. 47, the transition to RT does not proceed to RT at the end of the bonus (the RT start condition does not include the end of the bonus), but the transitioned RT ends with the prescribed number of games (the end condition includes the default number of games). It is a figure which shows the judgment condition type which can be selected about the slot machine of an applicable model.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, type 2 is provided with 24 types of determination condition types from T2-1 to T2-24 that can be selected.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT, so that a notification subject small role (AT small role) If it is a type that exists, the type T2-1 may be selected.

  When this type T2-1 is selected, N games are set as the calculation target number of games for which the AT small role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and before and after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table If the N game occurrence rate of the N game is equal to or greater than the probability P, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART) and that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state as an end condition. Determine the end of.

  These N game values and probability P values may be set similarly to the type T1-1. As with the type T1-1, whether or not the input of the RT2 signal corresponds to the start of RT or the end of RT is provided with an end condition regarding the occurrence state of the general winning combination, In response to the input of the RT2 signal, when the end condition is satisfied for N games before and after the input of the RT2 signal, it may be determined that the input RT2 signal is the end of RT.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT. ) Is a type that does not exist (a type that does not have a small role that improves the winning probability in ART and is a type in which an operation mode that avoids falling is informed) is selected, type T2-2 is selected. good.

  When this type T2-2 is selected, determination based on the AT small combination occurrence rate is impossible, so the period (number of games) from when the start RT2 signal is input to when the end RT2 signal is input However, more than the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling condition is satisfied (for example, if the winning probability of the falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the falling after the previous RT2 signal is input. It is only necessary to determine the start of ART based on the fact that the number of games corresponding to the probability that the condition is satisfied has passed without the next RT2 signal being input, and the end of ART is the same as T1-1. The termination condition may be that the RT2 signal is input during the determined ART.

  In the end determination, as in the case of the type T2-1, whether the input of the RT2 signal corresponds to the start of RT or the end of RT, the end condition regarding the occurrence state of the general winning combination is set. It is also possible to determine that the input RT2 signal is the end of RT when the end condition is satisfied for the N games before and after the input of the RT2 signal when the RT2 signal is input. good.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is a notification small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated by the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role can be identified from the number of payout medals. In some cases, type T2-3 may be selected.

  When this type T2-3 is selected, as with T2-1, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and calculated in the most recent game table. If the occurrence rate of the AT small combination in the N game before and after the input of the RT2 signal is greater than or equal to the probability P, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of the ART (the start of the ART). The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that there is a winning or the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start has reached the RT number of games.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is an informing small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated by the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals. In some cases, type T2-4 may be selected.

  When this type T2-4 is selected, as in T2-1, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and calculated in the most recent game table. If the occurrence rate of AT game in N games before and after the input of the RT2 signal is greater than or equal to the probability P, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART), and the end of the ART is determined for the end. The termination of ART is terminated on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in N games later is less than probability Q or that the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start has reached the specified number of RT games. to decide. Note that the end of ART may be determined on the condition that the AT small combination occurrence rate is equal to or less than the probability Q instead of the general combination occurrence rate.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no notification subject small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated due to the occurrence of a fallen role, and the fallable role can be identified from the number of paid-out medals. In some cases, type T2-5 may be selected.

  When this type T2-5 is selected, since the determination based on the AT small combination occurrence rate is impossible as in the case of type T2-2, the period from when the start RT2 signal is input until the falling combination wins (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the probability of winning a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the previous RT2 signal is input The start of the ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination has elapsed without winning the falling combination. On the other hand, regarding the end of the ART, the fact that there was a winning of a falling combination from the number of medals paid out in the ART state, or that the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start became the RT specified number of games. The end of ART is determined as an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no reporting small role (AT small role) and RT is terminated due to the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals. In some cases, type T2-6 may be selected.

  When this type T2-6 is selected, as with type T2-2, the determination based on the AT small combination occurrence rate is impossible, so the period from when the start RT2 signal is input until the falling combination wins (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the probability of winning a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the previous RT2 signal is input The start of the ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination has elapsed without winning the falling combination. On the other hand, as for the end of ART, as in the case of type T2-4, after the start of the ART is determined, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q, or when the RT2 signal determined to start is input The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games from has reached the specified number of RT games.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is an informing small role (AT small size), and the RT always digests the specified number of games without falling down (complete running type). In that case, the type T2-7 may be selected.

  When this type T2-7 is selected, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and before and after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table If the occurrence of an AT small combination in N games in the game is greater than or equal to the probability P, it is determined that an RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (ART start), and the number of games since the input of the RT2 signal determined to be started is determined. The end of the ART is determined on the condition that the number of games reaches the specified number of RTs.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no informing small part (AT small part), and the type in which RT always digests the specified number of games without falling down (complete running type). In that case, the type T2-8 may be selected.

  When this type T2-8 is selected, N games are set as the number of calculation target games whose general role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and before and after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table. If the occurrence rate of the general combination of N games is equal to or greater than the probability R, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input (ART start) by the start of ART, and the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to start is RT The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the specified number of games is reached.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and does not output an RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify a promotion role to be promoted to RT from the number of paid-out medals, and at the end of RT In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output (the type in which the RT2 signal is output only at the end of the RT) and there is a notification subject small role (AT small role), the type T2-9 may be selected. .

  When this type T2-9 is selected, N games are set as the number of games to be calculated for which the AT small role occurrence rate is calculated in the most recent game table, and the prize for the promoted role calculated in the most recent game table is set. If the occurrence rate of the AT small part before and after the game that detected the occurrence is equal to or higher than the probability P, it is determined that the ART is started, and the time when the promotion combination is won is determined as the start time of the ART. The end of the ART is determined on the condition that the RT2 signal has been input after the promotion combination that has been determined to start is received.

  The model to be set is a model that corresponds to Type 2 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, and the type that cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals for promotion that is promoted to RT. End of RT If it is a type that outputs an RT2 signal (type that outputs an RT2 signal only at the end of RT) and there is a notification minor (AT minor), type T2-10 is selected. good.

  When this type T2-10 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or higher than the probability P, and the general role occurrence rate of the N game is higher than the probability R. The start of the ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state in which the start is determined.

  These N game values, probabilities P, and probability R values may be set based on the occurrence probability of an AT small combination, the occurrence probability of a general winning combination, or the like in the target model. For example, out of 10 games that are N games There are 5 or more games in AT (probability P = 50% or more), and there are 8 games or more in the N-game 10 games (probability P = 80% or more). If there is, it may be judged that it is a start.

  Note that the value of the N game may be different between the AT small combination occurrence rate and the general combination occurrence rate. The N game, the probability Q, and the probability R may be values according to the specifications of the target model.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2 and does not output an RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify a promotion role to be promoted to RT from the number of paid-out medals, and at the end of RT In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output and there is no notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T2-11 may be selected.

  When this type T2-11 is selected, as in the case of type T2-9, the period (number of games) from the game in which it is detected that the promotion combination is won based on the number of payout medals until the end RT2 signal is input. ) Is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role (for example, if the probability of winning a fallen role is 1 / 5.8, it is equal to or greater than 6 games). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination has passed without the input of the RT2 signal, and the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined The end of ART is determined using the above as an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, and cannot promote the promotion role to be promoted to RT based on the number of paid-out medals, and at the end of RT In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output and there is no notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T2-12 may be selected.

  When this type T2-12 is selected, the period (number of games) from when the N-game general combination occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R until the end RT2 signal is input ) Is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or more than 6 games). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination has passed without the input of the RT2 signal, and the RT2 signal is displayed during the ART state where the start is determined. The termination of the ART is determined with the termination condition being input.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and is promoted to RT. If the promotion combination and the fallen combination are types that can be identified from the number of payout medals and the type includes the notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T2-13 may be selected.

  When this type T2-13 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the game in which it is detected from the number of payout medals that the promotion combination has been won is a probability P or more. As a starting condition, when the occurrence rate of the AT small part in the N game is equal to or higher than the probability P, it is determined that the time when the immediately preceding promoted part was won is the starting point, and there was a prize for the promoted part The termination of the ART is determined based on the termination condition that the winning combination of the falling role was later or that the number of games after winning the promotion role has reached the prescribed number of games of RT. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from winning the promotion combination to the completion of the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  The model to be set is a model that falls under Type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify the promoted combination from the number of paid-out medals and has a notification-related small role (AT small role), the type T2-14 may be selected.

  When this type T2-14 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or higher than the probability P, and the general game occurrence rate of the N game is equal to or higher than the probability R. The start of the ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the winning of the fallen role is received during the ART state in which the start is determined. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to the winning of the falling combination, it is not determined as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 2, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If the type can be identified from the number of medals but cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and the type includes a notification subject small part (AT small part), type T2-15 can be selected. good.

  When this type T2-15 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the game in which it is detected from the number of payout medals that a promotion combination has been won is a probability P or more. As a starting condition, when the occurrence rate of the AT small part in the N game is equal to or higher than the probability P, it is determined that the time when the immediately preceding promoted part was won is the starting point, and there was a prize for the promoted part After that, the end of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in N games is equal to or less than the probability Q, or the number of games after the winning combination of the promoted combination that has been determined to start is the RT specified number of games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. When the type is a type in which a combination cannot be identified from the number of payout medals and there is a notification small combination (AT small combination), type T2-16 may be selected.

  When this type T2-16 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of N games calculated in the most recent game table is greater than or equal to the probability P, and the N game general role occurrence rate is greater than or equal to the probability R. The start of ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and thereafter the end of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and is promoted to RT. If the promotion combination and the fallen combination are types that can be identified from the number of paid-out medals and there is no notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T2-17 may be selected.

  When this type T2-17 is selected, the period (number of games) from the game in which it was detected that there was a promotion role winning from the number of paid-out medals until it was detected that there was a falling role winning was (the number of games) More than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the winning combination (for example, if the winning probability of the falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning has not been won for the falling role, and the start time is determined as the start time of the promotion role, and the start is determined After that, the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the winning combination of the falling combination has been received or the number of games after the promotion combination has reached the prescribed number of games of RT. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from the promotion winning combination to the falling winning combination, it is not determined as an ART.

  The model to be set is a model that falls under Type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify a promoted combination from the number of paid-out medals and does not have a notification subject small combination (AT small combination), type T2-18 may be selected.

  When this type T2-18 is selected, the period from when the N-game general combination occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R to when it is detected that there has been a winning combination of a falling combination (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or more than 6 games). The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination after having become R or more has passed without winning the falling combination, and falls during the ART state where the start is determined The end of ART is determined on the condition that winning a winning combination is an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 2, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If it is a type that can be identified from the number of medals but cannot identify a fallen combination from the number of paid-out medals and does not have a notification subject small role (AT small role), type T2-19 may be selected.

  When this type T2-19 is selected, the period from the game in which it is detected that the promotion combination is won based on the number of paid-out medals until the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game, which is the end condition, becomes less than the probability Q (Number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role (for example, if the probability of winning a fallen role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). After that, the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role has passed without the general role occurrence rate in N games having dropped below the probability Q, and the start condition of the ART is determined. It is determined that the time when a winning occurs is the starting time, and after determining the start, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q, or the number of games after winning the promotion winning combination is RT Termination condition that became a number To determine the end of the ART in. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from the winning of the promoted combination until the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q, it is not determined as an ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If the combination is a type that cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals and falls, and there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination), the type T2-20 may be selected.

  When this type T2-20 is selected, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game, which is the ending condition, is a probability from the time when the N combination general occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R. The period until the Q or less (number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling role (for example, if the winning probability of a falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or greater than 6). The number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role after the N-game general role occurrence rate is equal to or greater than the probability R has elapsed without the general role occurrence rate during the N game falling below the probability Q The start of ART is determined as a condition, and the time when the occurrence rate of the general combination becomes equal to or higher than the probability R is determined as the start time. After the determination is made, the occurrence rate of the general combination during the N game becomes the probability Q or less. As an end condition To determine the end. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the start condition to the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 2, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. If it is a complete running type that can be identified from the number of medals but does not fall, and is a type that has a notification small role (AT small role), type T2-21 may be selected.

  When this type T2-21 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of N games calculated in the most recent game table from the game in which it is detected that the promotion combination is won from the number of paid-out medals has a probability P or more. As a starting condition, when the occurrence ratio of the AT small part in the N game is equal to or higher than the probability P, the time when the immediately preceding promotion role is won is determined as the start time, and The termination of the ART is determined based on the termination condition that the number of games after winning the game has reached the prescribed number of RT games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 2, and does not output RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs RT2 signal during RT period. In the case of a complete running type that cannot be identified from the number of medals and does not fall, and that is a type that has a notification subject small role (AT small role), the type T2-22 may be selected.

  When this type T2-22 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or higher than the probability P, and the general game occurrence rate of the N game is higher than the probability R. The start of ART is determined on the basis of a certain condition, and thereafter the end of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and is promoted to RT. When the promotion combination is a type that can be identified from the number of payout medals and does not fall, and is a type that does not have a notification subject small role (AT small role), type T2-23 may be selected. .

  When this type T2-23 is selected, the start condition is that the occurrence rate of the general combination of the N games before and after the game in which it is detected that the promotion combination is won from the number of paid-out medals is equal to or higher than the probability R. The start is determined, and the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the number of games after winning the promotion role has reached the RT specified number of games. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from the promotion winning combination to the falling winning combination, it is not determined as an ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 2, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and is promoted to RT. If the promotion combination is a complete running type in which the number of payout medals cannot be identified and the fall does not occur, and there is no notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T2-24 may be selected.

  When this type T2-24 is selected, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game, which is the ending condition, is a probability from the time when the N combination general occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R. The period until the Q or less (number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling role (for example, if the winning probability of a falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or greater than 6). The number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role after the N-game general role occurrence rate is equal to or greater than the probability R has elapsed without the general role occurrence rate during the N game falling below the probability Q The start of ART is determined as a condition, and the time when the occurrence rate of the general combination becomes equal to or higher than the probability R is determined as the start time. After the determination is made, the occurrence rate of the general combination during the N game becomes the probability Q or less. As an end condition To determine the end. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the start condition to the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  In this embodiment, for types T2-13 to T2-24, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART. Thus, it is possible to confirm that the start and end judgments were correct depending on whether or not the RT2 signal is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the model that does not output these RT2 signals can also be used. , Types T2-13 to T2-24 are set, and even if there is no input of RT2 signal within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the start and end of ART is determined by determining as ART. It is possible to judge. Therefore, for the types T2-13 to T2-24 in FIG.

  In FIG. 48, the transferred RT does not end with the specified number of games (the end condition does not include the default number of games), but shifts to RT at the end of the bonus (the RT start condition includes the end of the bonus). It is a figure which shows the judgment condition type which can be selected about the slot machine of an applicable model.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT, so that a notification subject small role (AT small role) Is a type that exists, the type T3-1 may be selected.

  When this type T3-1 is selected, the RT2 signal is input when the bonus ends (the BB signal and the RB signal change from ON to OFF), and the AT small combination occurrence rate is the most recent game table. The N game is set as the number of calculation target games to be calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of the N game after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is a probability P or more, and the start condition If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART), and the RT2 signal that is not the input of the RT2 signal when the bonus ends, that is, the BB signal and the RB signal change from ON to OFF. The termination of the ART is determined based on the termination condition that the RT2 signal not associated with the input is input, specifically, that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state. These N game values and probability P values may be set similarly to the type T1-1.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT. ) Is a type that does not exist (a type that does not have a small role in which the winning probability is improved in ART and is a type in which an operation mode that avoids falling is informed) is selected, type T3-2 is selected. good.

  When this type T3-2 is selected, RT2 signal is input when the bonus ends (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and RT2 ends after the RT2 signal is input. The period (number of games) until the signal is input is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling combination wins (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). In other words, it is only necessary to determine the start of ART based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability that a drop-in prize will be established after the previous RT2 signal is input without the next RT2 signal being input. As in T3-1, the end of the RT2 signal that is not the input of the RT2 signal accompanying the end of the bonus, that is, the RT2 signal that does not change from ON to OFF of the BB signal and RB signal is input. Specifically, to determine the end of the ART as the end condition that RT2 signal is input during ART state.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 3 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). Select the type T3-3 if the RT2 signal is output only once, and there is a notification small part (AT small part) and the type that can identify the falling combination from the number of medals paid out. Just do it.

  When this type T3-3 is selected, as in T3-1, it is the input of the RT2 signal when the bonus ends (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and at the latest game table N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small character occurrence rate is calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of N games after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is started with a probability P or more If the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART). Determine the end of.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 3 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and when there is a notification small part (AT small part) and the type in which the falling combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, type T3-4 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T3-4 is selected, as in T3-1, it is an RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and in the most recent game table N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small character occurrence rate is calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of N games after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is started with a probability P or more If the condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input (ART start) by starting the ART, and regarding the end, after determining the start of the ART, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game Is determined to be the end condition, and the end of ART is determined. Note that the end of ART may be determined on the condition that the AT small combination occurrence rate is equal to or less than the probability Q instead of the general combination occurrence rate.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 3 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and if there is no informing small part (AT small part) but it is a type that can identify the falling part from the number of payout medals, select type T3-5 Just do it.

  When this type T3-5 is selected, it is the RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and the RT2 signal is the same as type T3-2. The period (number of games) from the input until the end RT2 signal is input is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8) , 6 games or more), that is, the start of ART with the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability that a drop-in prize is established after the previous RT2 signal is input without the next RT2 signal being input Judging. On the other hand, regarding the end of ART, as in type T3-3, the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that there has been a winning of a winning combination based on the number of payout medals in the ART state.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to Type 3 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and when there is no informing small part (AT small part) and the type in which the falling combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, type T3-6 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T3-6 is selected, it is the RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), as with type T3-2, as with type T3-2. In addition, the period (number of games) from when the RT2 signal is input to when the end RT2 signal is input is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling combination wins (for example, the winning probability of the falling combination is 1). If it is /5.8, it is 6 games or more), that is, the number of games corresponding to the probability that a drop-in prize will be established after the previous RT2 signal is input without the next RT2 signal being input. Is determined as the start condition. On the other hand, regarding the end of ART, as in the case of type T3-4, after determining the start of the ART, the end of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q.

  The model to be set is a model that corresponds to Type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can be identified from the BB signal or RB signal as to whether or not the bonus is a transition to RT. When the RT is finished, the RT2 signal is output. When the type is the type in which the notification subject small role (AT small role) exists (the type that outputs the RT2 signal only at the end of the RT), the type T3- 7 may be selected.

  In addition, as a type (bonus classification is ◯) that can be identified from the BB signal or the RB signal as to whether or not the bonus is to shift to RT, for example, if it is a big bonus (BB), it shifts to RT, In some cases, such as a model that does not shift to RT, a model that can identify whether or not it is a bonus that shifts to RT from BB signal or RB signal is exemplified, and whether or not it is a bonus that shifts to RT As a type that cannot be identified from the RB signal (bonus classification is x), for example, there are a plurality of types (BB1, BB2) in the big bonus (BB), and BB1 shifts to RT but BB2 does not shift to RT As shown in the figure, a model in which it is not possible to identify whether or not it is a bonus to shift to RT by the BB signal is exemplified.

  When this type T3-7 is selected, the start of the ART is determined based on the start condition that the occurrence rate of the AT small part in the N game after the end of the RT target bonus is detected is equal to or higher than the probability P. Then, the end time of the bonus is determined as the start time of the ART, and the end of the ART is determined on the condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, which does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, and cannot identify the bonus for shifting to RT, and the RT2 signal at the end of RT. And the type T3-8 may be selected in the case where there is a notification target small combination (AT small combination) (type that outputs an RT2 signal only at the end of RT).

  When this type T3-8 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of N games after the end of the bonus is detected is a probability P or more, and the N game general combination occurrence rate is a probability R or more. As a start condition, the start of the ART is determined, and the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify a bonus for transitioning to RT, and the RT2 signal at the end of RT. Is output, and the type T3-9 may be selected when there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination).

  When this type T3-9 is selected, the period (number of games) from the game in which the end of the RT target bonus is detected until the end RT2 signal is input is the same as the type T3-7. More than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning (for example, if the winning probability of a fallen role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the probability of winning a fallen role after winning a promotion role The start condition of the ART is determined based on the fact that the number of games corresponding to the elapse of time without the RT2 signal being input, and the end condition is that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined. Determine the end of ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, which does not output an RT2 signal at the start of RT and cannot recognize a bonus for shifting to RT, and outputs an RT2 signal at the end of RT. If it is a type that is output and does not have a notification subject small combination (AT small combination), type T3-10 may be selected.

  When this type T3-10 is selected, the general combination occurrence rate of the N game after detecting the end of the bonus is equal to or higher than the probability R, and the RT2 signal that ends after the bonus ends is input. The period until the game is played (the number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a fallen role (for example, if the probability of winning a fallen role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). The start of the ART is determined on the basis of the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the winning combination is the probability of winning a falling combination and the RT2 signal has not been input, and the start is determined. The termination of the ART is determined on the condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus is identifiable and the fallable combination is identifiable from the number of paid-out medals, and the type includes a notification subject small combination (AT small combination), type T3-11 may be selected.

  When this type T3-11 is selected, the start of the ART is determined based on the start condition that the occurrence rate of the AT small part in the N game after detecting the end of the RT target bonus is equal to or higher than the probability P. The end time of the bonus is determined to be the start time of the ART, and the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the winning combination of the fallen role is received after the end of the bonus. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from the end of the ART target bonus to the winning of the falling combination, the ART is not determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus is indistinguishable and the fallable combination is identifiable from the number of paid-out medals and the type includes a notification target small combination (AT small combination), type T3-12 may be selected.

  When this type T3-12 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game after detecting the end of the bonus is the probability P or more, and the general game occurrence rate of the N game is the probability R or more. The start of ART is determined based on the start condition, and the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the winning of the falling role is received during the ART state in which the start is determined. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from the end of the bonus for the ART to the winning of the falling combination, the ART is not determined.

  It should be noted that the probability R in this case may be set to a value higher than the winning combination probability of the falling combination. By doing in this way, it is confirmed that the general winning combination is generated without winning the falling combination. It will be a condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus can be identified but the fallable combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and there is a notification minor (AT minor), type T3-13 is selected. good.

  When this type T3-13 is selected, it is determined that the AT small portion occurrence rate of the N game after the end of the RT target bonus is detected is equal to or higher than the probability P. When the occurrence rate of the winning combination is equal to or higher than the probability P, the end point of the immediately preceding RT target bonus is determined as the starting point, and after the RT target bonus ends, the general combination in the N game calculated in the most recent game table The termination of ART is determined on the condition that the occurrence rate is less than probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus cannot be identified and the falling combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and the type includes a notification subject small combination (AT small combination), the type T3-14 may be selected.

  When this type T3-14 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game after detecting the end of the bonus is the probability P or more, and the general game occurrence rate of the N game is the probability R or more. As a start condition, the start of the ART is determined, and after the start of the ART is determined, the end of the ART is determined with the general condition occurrence rate in the N game being less than the probability Q as the end condition. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus is identifiable and the fallable combination is identifiable from the number of paid-out medals and there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination), the type T3-15 may be selected.

  When this type T3-15 is selected, the period (number of games) from the detection of the end of the RT target bonus to the detection of the winning of the falling combination is the probability of winning the falling combination. More than the corresponding number of games (for example, if the winning probability of the falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the game corresponding to the probability of winning the falling role after the RT target bonus is over. The start of the ART is determined on the condition that the number has passed without winning the falling combination, and the time when the bonus for the RT is completed is determined to be the start time. The end of ART is determined using the end condition as the end condition. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from the end of the RT target bonus to the winning of the falling combination, it is not determined as an ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus cannot be identified, the falling combination can be identified from the number of payout medals, and there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination), the type T3-16 may be selected.

  When this type T3-16 is selected, the occurrence rate of the general combination of N games after the end of the bonus is detected is equal to or higher than the probability R, and the end of the bonus is detected after the end of the bonus is detected. The number of games (the number of games) until it is detected that there has been a winning is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a winning combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling winning combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 That is, when the start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination has passed without winning the falling combination after the bonus ends. Is determined to be the start time, and the end of the ART is determined with the end condition being a prize for a falling combination during the ART state where the start is determined. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to the winning of the falling combination, it is not determined as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus can be identified but the fallable combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals and there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination), type T3-17 may be selected.

  When this type T3-17 is selected, the period (number of games) from the game in which the end of the RT target bonus is detected until the general combination occurrence rate in the N game as the end condition becomes less than the probability Q is More than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). The start time of ART is determined on the condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the game has passed without the general character occurrence rate in N games falling below the probability Q. In addition to determining the start time, the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q after determining the start. However, if the RT2 signal is not input within the period from the end of the RT target bonus until the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game becomes equal to or less than the probability Q, the RT is not determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 3, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to the RT. If the bonus cannot be identified and the fallen combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination), type T3-18 may be selected. .

  When this type T3-18 is selected, the occurrence rate of the general combination of the N game after detecting the end of the bonus is equal to or greater than the probability R, and after detecting the end of the bonus, The number of games (the number of games) until it is detected that there has been a winning is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a winning combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling winning combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 That is, when the start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination has passed without winning the falling combination after the bonus ends. Is determined to be the start time, and after the start is determined, the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the start condition to the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  In this embodiment, for types T3-11 to T3-18, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, it is not determined as ART. Thus, it is possible to confirm that the start and end judgments were correct depending on whether or not the RT2 signal is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the model that does not output these RT2 signals can also be used. , Types T3-11 to T3-18 are set, and if the RT2 signal is not input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, it is determined as ART, It is possible to determine the end. Therefore, for T types T3-11 to T3-18 in FIG.

  FIG. 49 corresponds to Type 4 where the transition is made to RT at the end of the bonus (the start condition of RT includes the end of the bonus) and the transferred RT is finished with the specified number of games (the number of games is included in the end condition) 5 is a diagram showing determination condition types that can be selected for a slot machine of a model to be selected.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the type 4 is provided with 24 types of determination condition types from T4-1 to T4-24.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs the RT2 signal at the end of the RT, so that the notification target small role (AT small role) May be selected, type T4-1 may be selected.

  When this type T4-1 is selected, the RT2 signal is input when the bonus ends (the BB signal and the RB signal change from ON to OFF), and the AT small combination occurrence rate is the most recent game table. The N game is set as the number of calculation target games to be calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of the N game after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is a probability P or more, and the start condition If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART), and the RT2 signal that is not the input of the RT2 signal when the bonus ends, that is, the BB signal and the RB signal change from ON to OFF. The termination of the ART is determined based on the termination condition that the RT2 signal not associated with the input is input, specifically, that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of the RT. ) Is a type that does not exist (a type that does not have a small role in which the winning probability is improved in ART and is a type in which an operation mode that avoids falling is informed) is selected, type T4-2 is selected. good.

  When this type T4-2 is selected, RT2 signal is input when the bonus ends (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and RT2 ends after the RT2 signal is input. The period (number of games) until the signal is input is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling combination wins (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more). In other words, it is only necessary to determine the start of ART based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability that a drop-in prize will be established after the previous RT2 signal is input without the next RT2 signal being input. This is because the RT2 signal that is not the RT2 signal input accompanying the end of the bonus, that is, the RT2 signal that does not change from ON to OFF of the BB signal and RB signal is input. There is determined the completion of ART as the end condition RT2 that the signal is input during is determined ART state.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is a notification small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated by the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role can be identified from the number of payout medals. In some cases, type T4-3 may be selected.

  When this type T4-3 is selected, as in T4-1, it is an RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and in the most recent game table N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small character occurrence rate is calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of N games after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is started with a probability P or more If the condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input (ART start) when the ART is started, and the RT2 signal that is not the RT2 signal input when the bonus is ended, that is, the BB signal and the RB signal It is determined that the RT2 signal that does not change from ON to OFF has been input, specifically, that the RT2 signal has been input during the ART state, or has started. The number of games from the time of input of the T2 signal to determine the end of the ART as the end condition that has become a prescribed number of games RT.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is an informing small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated by the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals. In some cases, type T4-4 may be selected.

  When this type T4-4 is selected, as in T4-1, it is an RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and in the most recent game table N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the AT small character occurrence rate is calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of N games after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is started with a probability P or more If the condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input (ART start) by starting the ART, and regarding the end, after determining the start of the ART, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game The end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games after the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start is the specified number of RTs That. Note that the end of ART may be determined on the condition that the AT small combination occurrence rate is equal to or less than the probability Q instead of the general combination occurrence rate.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no notification subject small role (AT small role), and RT is terminated due to the occurrence of a fallen role, and the fallable role can be identified from the number of paid-out medals. In some cases, type T4-5 may be selected.

  When this type T4-5 is selected, the RT2 signal is input when the bonus ends (the BB signal and the RB signal change from ON to OFF). The period until the winning (number of games) is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling role wins (for example, if the winning probability of the falling role is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is equal to or more than 6 games). The start of ART is determined on the basis of the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability that a falling winning is established after the RT2 signal is input without the falling combination winning. On the other hand, regarding the end of the ART, the fact that there was a winning of a falling combination from the number of medals paid out in the ART state, or that the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start became the RT specified number of games. The end of ART is determined as an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no reporting small role (AT small role) and RT is terminated due to the occurrence of a falling role, and the falling role cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals. In some cases, type T4-6 may be selected.

  When this type T4-6 is selected, the RT2 signal is input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and after the RT2 signal is input, The period (the number of games) until the occurrence rate of the general combination in a certain N game is equal to or less than the probability Q is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability that the falling combination wins (for example, the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8). If the number of games is equal to or greater than 6), that is, the number of games corresponding to the probability that a drop-in prize will be established after the previous RT2 signal is input is the general condition occurrence rate in N games with a probability Q or less. The start of ART is determined based on the fact that it has passed without being. On the other hand, as for the end of ART, as in the case of type T4-4, after the start of the ART is determined, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q, or when the RT2 signal that is determined to start is input The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games from has reached the specified number of RT games.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is an informing small role (AT small size), and the RT always digests the specified number of games without falling down (complete running type). In that case, the type T4-7 may be selected.

  When this type T4-7 is selected, it is an RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and the AT small combination occurrence rate in the most recent game table is The N game is set as the number of calculation target games to be calculated, and the AT small character occurrence rate of the N game after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is a probability P or more, and the start condition If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (ART start), and regarding the end, it is determined that the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start has reached the RT specified number of games. The end of ART is determined as an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs the RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). RT2 signal is output only once), and there is no informing small part (AT small part), and the type in which RT always digests the specified number of games without falling down (complete running type). In that case, the type T4-8 may be selected.

  When this type T4-8 is selected, it is an RT2 signal input at the end of the bonus (BB signal, RB signal changes from ON to OFF), and the general combination occurrence rate is calculated in the latest game table If the N game is set as the number of games to be calculated, and if the general game occurrence rate of the N game after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the probability R, the input of the RT2 signal by the start of ART ( As for the end, the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games from the input of the RT2 signal determined to be the start is the RT number of games.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and does not output an RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify a bonus for shifting to RT, and an RT2 signal at the end of RT. Is output (the type that outputs the RT2 signal only at the end of RT), and if the notification subject small role (AT small role) exists, the type T4-9 may be selected.

  When this type T4-9 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game after the end of the RT target bonus is detected is equal to or greater than the probability P, and the N game general combination occurrence rate is The start of the ART is determined based on the start condition being the probability R or more, and the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, and cannot recognize the bonus for shifting to RT, and the RT2 signal at the end of RT. Is output (the type that outputs the RT2 signal only at the end of RT), and if it is a type in which there is a notification subject small role (AT small role), the type T4-10 may be selected.

  When this type T4-10 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game after detecting the end of the bonus is the probability P or more, and the general game occurrence rate of the N game is the probability R or more. As a start condition, the start of the ART is determined, and the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined.

  The values of the N game, the probability P, and the probability R may be set based on the occurrence probability of the AT small combination, the occurrence probability of the general winning combination, or the like in the target model.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and does not output an RT2 signal at the start of RT, but is a type that can identify a bonus for shifting to RT, and an RT2 signal at the end of RT. And the type T4-11 may be selected if there is no notification target small combination (AT small combination).

  When this type T4-11 is selected, a game (number of games) from when the end of the RT target bonus is detected to when the end RT2 signal is input corresponds to the probability of winning the falling combination. The RT2 signal is input for a number equal to or greater than the number (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, 6 games or more), that is, the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination after the bonus ends. The start of ART is determined based on the fact that it has passed without start, and the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the RT2 signal is input during the ART state where the start is determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and cannot recognize a bonus for shifting to RT, and outputs an RT2 signal at the end of RT. In the case of a type that is output and does not have a notification target small combination (AT small combination), type T4-12 may be selected.

  If this type T4-12 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of N games after detecting the end of the bonus is greater than or equal to the probability P, and the RT2 signal that ends from the end of the bonus is input. The period (number of games) until the game is over the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, the number of games is over 6 if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8), that is, the bonus The start of the ART is determined on the condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination from the end has passed without the input of the RT2 signal, and the RT2 signal is displayed during the ART state where the start is determined. The end of ART is determined using the input as an end condition.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. When the bonus is identifiable, the fall occurs, and the fallable combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and the type includes the notification subject small combination (AT small combination), type T4-13 is selected. Just choose.

  When this type T4-13 is selected, the N game will be subject to the start condition that the AT small portion occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the RT target bonus is equal to or higher than the probability P. When the occurrence ratio of the AT small part is equal to or greater than the probability P, the end point of the immediately preceding bonus is determined as the start point, The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games has reached the specified number of RT games. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the end of the bonus until the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. If the bonus cannot be identified, a fall occurs, the fall combination can be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and there is a notification minor (AT minor), type T4-14 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T4-14 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of N games calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the bonus is greater than or equal to the probability P, and the general combination occurrence rate of N games is It is determined that the start of the ART is determined on the condition that the probability is equal to or greater than R, and that the fall game has been won during the ART state in which the start is determined, or that the number of games after the end of the bonus is RT The end of ART is determined by using the number as an end condition. However, if the RT2 signal is not input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to the winning of the falling combination, it is not determined as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. In the case where the bonus can be identified, the fall occurs and the fallable combination cannot be identified from the number of medals to be paid out, and there is a notification minor (AT minor), type T4-15 is selected. Just choose.

  When this type T4-15 is selected, the N game's AT small portion occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the RT target bonus is set to a probability P or more as a starting condition. When the AT small role occurrence rate is equal to or higher than the probability P, the immediately preceding bonus end point is determined as the start point, and after the bonus ends, the general combination occurrence rate during the N game is less than the probability Q or after the bonus end The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games has reached the specified number of RT games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. In the case where the bonus cannot be identified, the fall occurs, and the fall role cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and there is a notification minor (AT minor), type T4-16 is selected. Just choose.

  When this type T4-16 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the bonus is equal to or higher than the probability P, and the general combination occurrence rate of the N game is a probability. The start condition of ART is determined based on the start condition being equal to or greater than R, and thereafter, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is equal to or less than the probability Q, or the number of games after the bonus ends The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. When the bonus is identifiable, the fall occurs, the fallable combination is identifiable from the number of paid-out medals, and there is no notification minor (AT minor), type T4-17 is selected. Just choose.

  When this type T4-17 is selected, the number of games corresponding to the probability that the RT target bonus is from the end to the time when it is detected that there has been a winning of the falling role (number of games) is won by the falling role. More than the above (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination from the end of the bonus without winning the falling combination. The start of ART is determined on the basis of the elapsed time, and the time when the bonus ends is determined as the start time. After determining the start, there is a winning of a fallen role, or the game after the bonus ends The end of the ART is determined on the condition that the number has reached the RT specified number of games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. If the bonus cannot be identified, the fall occurs, the fall combination can be identified from the number of payout medals, and there is no notification subject small role (AT small role), the type T4-18 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T4-18 is selected, it is confirmed that the general game occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the bonus is equal to or greater than the probability R, and that the winning combination of the falling role has been received from the end of the bonus. The period until the detection (number of games) is equal to or more than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of a falling combination is 1 / 5.8, the number of games is 6 or more), that is, a bonus The start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination from the end has passed without winning the falling combination, and the falling combination is awarded during the ART state where the start is determined. In other words, the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games after the end of the bonus has reached the RT specified number of games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. If the bonus is identifiable, if a fall occurs, the fallable combination cannot be identified from the number of medals paid out, and there is no informed small (AT small), type T4-19 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T4-19 is selected, the period (number of games) from the end of the RT target bonus until the general combination occurrence rate in the N game, which is the end condition, becomes less than or equal to the probability Q is determined as a fall combination. More than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning (for example, 6 or more if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8), that is, the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination after the bonus ends. However, the start condition of the ART is determined on the condition that the general character occurrence rate in the N game has passed without the probability Q or less, and the end time of the bonus is determined as the start time, and the start is determined. The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game later becomes the probability Q or less, or that the number of games after the bonus ends becomes the specified number of RT games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. When the bonus cannot be identified, the fall occurs, the fall combination cannot be identified from the number of paid-out medals, and there is no notification subject small role (AT small role), the type T4-20 is selected. It ’s fine.

  When this type T4-20 is selected, the N-game general combination occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the bonus is equal to or higher than the probability R, and during the N-game, which is the end condition from the end of the bonus The period (number of games) until the occurrence rate of the general combination becomes equal to or less than the probability Q is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, (6 games or more), that is, the start of ART with the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination from the end of the bonus has passed without the general role occurrence rate in N games falling below the probability Q The bonus end time is determined as the start time, and after determining the start, the occurrence rate of the general combination in the N game is less than the probability Q, or the number of games after the bonus ends is RT To determine the end of the ART as the end condition that has become the number constant game. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the start condition to the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. In the case of a complete running type that can identify a bonus and does not cause a fall, and that is a type in which there is a notification small part (AT small part), the type T4-21 may be selected.

  When this type T4-21 is selected, the start of ART is started on the condition that the AT small part occurrence rate of N games calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the RT target bonus is equal to or higher than the probability P. The end time of the bonus is determined as the start time, and the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games after the end of the bonus has reached the specified number of RT games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. If it is a complete running type in which a bonus cannot be identified and a fall does not occur, and a type in which a notification subject small role (AT small role) exists, type T4-22 may be selected.

  When this type T4-22 is selected, the AT small part occurrence rate of the N game calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the bonus is the probability P or more, and the N game general combination occurrence rate is The start of ART is determined with a probability R or higher as a start condition, and the end time of the bonus is determined as the start time, and the number of games after the end of the bonus is finished to the RT specified number of games The end of ART is determined as a condition. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. In the case of a complete running type in which a bonus can be identified and no fall occurs and there is no informing subject small role (AT small role), type T4-23 may be selected.

  When this type T4-23 is selected, the start of ART is determined based on the start condition that the occurrence rate of the general combination of N games after the end of the bonus for RT is equal to or greater than the probability R, and the end time of the bonus Is determined to be the start time, and the end of ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games after the end of the bonus has reached the RT specified number of games. However, if no RT2 signal is input during the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the determination is not made as ART.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 4, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, and shifts to RT. In the case of a complete running type in which a bonus cannot be identified and a fall does not occur, and there is no notification subject small role (AT small role), type T4-24 may be selected.

  When this type T4-24 is selected, the N-game general combination occurrence rate calculated in the most recent game table from the end of the bonus is equal to or higher than the probability R, and the N-game during the N-game is the end condition from the end of the bonus The period (number of games) until the occurrence rate of the general combination becomes equal to or less than the probability Q is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning the falling combination (for example, if the winning probability of the falling combination is 1 / 5.8, (6 games or more), that is, the start of ART with the start condition that the number of games corresponding to the probability of winning a falling combination from the end of the bonus has passed without the general role occurrence rate in N games falling below the probability Q The bonus end point is determined as the start point, and the end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that the number of games after the end of the bonus has reached the specified number of RT games. However, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from the start condition to the end condition, the ART is not determined.

  In this embodiment, for types T4-13 to T4-24, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, it is not determined as ART. Thus, it is possible to confirm that the start and end judgments were correct depending on whether or not the RT2 signal is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the model that does not output these RT2 signals can also be used. , Types T4-13 to T4-24 are set, and even if there is no RT2 signal input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, the ART is started and ended It is possible to judge. Therefore, for the types T4-13 to T4-24 in FIG.

  In FIG. 50, the transition is made to the replay time not by the end of the bonus but by the internal winning of the bonus, and RT continues until the winning bonus is won, but it is uncertain whether or not the assist is given at the replay time. In addition, if the assist is given, the medal payout rate exceeds 1, while the medal payout rate is 1 or less if the assist is not given. is there.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the type 5 includes four types of determination condition types T5-1 to T5-4 that can be selected.

  If the model to be set is a model corresponding to type 5 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and also outputs an RT2 signal at the end of RT, type T5- 1 may be selected.

  When this type T5-1 is selected, N games are set as the number of calculation target games whose latest base is calculated in the latest game table, and N games after the input of the RT2 signal calculated in the latest game table If the medal payout rate between N games after the input of the RT2 signal exceeds 1, the RT2 signal is input by the start of the ART (the start of the ART), and the RT2 signal is output during the ART state. The end of the ART is determined based on the end condition that is input (bonus winning) or the most recent base of the N games calculated in the most recent game table, that is, the medal payout rate between the past N games is 1 or less.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 5 and outputs an RT2 signal at the start of RT and does not output an RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the start of RT during RT). In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output only once), the type T5-2 may be selected.

  When this type T5-2 is selected, N games are set as the number of calculation target games for which the most recent base is calculated in the most recent game table, and N games after the RT2 signal calculated in the most recent game table is input. If the medal payout rate between N games after the input of the RT2 signal exceeds 1, the RT2 signal is input by the start of ART (the start of ART) and a bonus is transferred during the ART state. (Terminating BB signal, RB signal, etc.) or the immediate base of N games calculated in the most recent game table, that is, ART as an end condition that the medal payout rate between the past N games is 1 or less Determine the end of.

  The model to be set is a model corresponding to type 5, and does not output the RT2 signal at the start of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal at the end of RT (only at the end of RT in RT) In the case of the type in which the RT2 signal is output only once), the type T5-3 may be selected.

  When this type T5-3 is selected, N games are set as the number of games to be calculated for which the most recent base is calculated in the most recent game table, and the most recent base of the N games calculated in the most recent game table, that is, the past If the payout rate of medals between N games exceeds 1, it is determined that ART starts (except when the last base of N games is 1 or less without receiving a signal at the end) and ART The termination of ART is determined on the condition that the RT2 signal is input during the state.

  When the model to be set is a model corresponding to type 5 and does not output the RT2 signal at the start and end of RT, but outputs the RT2 signal during the RT period, type T5 -4 should be selected.

  When this type T5-3 is selected, N games are set as the number of games to be calculated for which the most recent base is calculated in the most recent game table, and the most recent base of the N games calculated in the most recent game table, that is, the past If the payout rate of medals between N games exceeds 1, it is determined that ART starts (except when the last base of N games is 1 or less without receiving a signal at the end) and ART The end of ART is determined on the condition that the transition to the bonus during the state (reception of the BB signal, the RB signal, etc.) is made.

  In the present embodiment, for type T5-4, if no RT2 signal is input within the period from when the start condition is satisfied to when the end condition is satisfied, RT2 is not determined as RT. Although it is possible to confirm that the start and end judgments are correct depending on the presence or absence of signal input, the present invention is not limited to this, and even for models that do not output the RT2 signal, type T5- 4 is set, and it is possible to determine the start and end of ART by determining as ART even if there is no RT2 signal input within the period from the start condition to the end condition being satisfied. It is. Therefore, for the type T5-4 in FIG.

  Then, after specifying the setting contents in each item on these ART-related setting screens, by selecting and inputting a “setting” selection input section provided below the ART-related setting screen, the ART-related setting screen is displayed. The ART-related setting information including data that can specify the selected content is the game number that corresponds to the machine number specified in the item of “Setting object” (all cars installed on the island in the case of islands). The calling lamp device 200 having the calling lamp ID stored in the information table, that is, the calling lamp device 200 installed corresponding to the slot machine 1 having the unit number specified in the item “target table”, The collection unit 50 of the collection unit ID stored in the game information table today corresponding to the machine number specified in the item of “target table”, ie, Are sent to the collection unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1 of the machine number designated in the item “target table”, and the ART-related setting information in the EEPROM 276 of the calling lamp device 200 and the EEPROM 576 of the collection unit 50. The storage processing is performed by the control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579 so that the transmitted ART-related setting information is stored in the EEPROMs 276 and 576, and will be described later which is performed in the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50. Used in each process. In the collection unit 50, since there are a plurality of four connected slot machines 1, setting information is stored in association with each of the connected machine numbers.

  That is, in the hall computer 140, a determination method and determination conditions (start condition, end condition) are set according to the model of the slot machine 1 to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond.

  In addition, in the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation, the 1 unit related setting screen shown in FIG. 45 is displayed, and settings related to 1 unit in each of the calling lamp devices 200 and the collection unit 50 are performed. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the one-unit-related setting screen of this embodiment includes an item “setting target table” for selecting and specifying the slot machine 1 corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set. In addition, an item “number of unit continuation determination games” for setting the number of games, which is a period for determining unit continuation when an ART or bonus occurs, is provided.

  The item “Setting Target Unit” in this 1 unit related setting screen is the same as the ART related setting screen, and a check box and selection are made for each selection menu of “island unit” and “unit unit” which can be exclusively selected. A window is provided, and by selecting “island unit” and inputting an island number, the calling lamp device 200 to be set and the slot machine 1 to which the collection unit 50 corresponds are designated for each “island unit”. In addition, by designating the machine number of the slot machine 1, the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 corresponding to one slot machine 1 can be designated as setting targets.

  In addition, the item “unit continuation determination game number” includes an item “when BB / RB ends” and an item “when ART ends”, and a game number setting section is provided for each item. By being provided, it is possible to individually set a game for determining unit continuation when BB / RB ends and when ART ends.

  As the number of games set on the one-unit related setting screen, for example, as described above as an example of the slot machine 1, the slot machine 1 to be set changes from the RT1 state that shifts after the end of RT to RT2 again. When the transition is made, only the RT0 state is passed, whereas when shifting from the bonus to the RT2, a model that needs to go through a plurality of gaming states of RT3 state → RT1 state → RT0 state (see FIG. 11). Even if it is determined to shift to RT2 before the bonus ends, when switching to RT2 again after the bonus ends, the slot machine shifts to RT before RT ends. Since it is determined that a longer number of games is required than when moving to RT again after the end of the RT, The number of games is larger than the number of games obtained by adding an appropriate margin value to the average number of games required for passing through the RT0 state, specifically, it is required via the RT3 state → RT1 state → RT0 state. The number of games obtained by adding an appropriate margin value to the average number of games may be set.

  That is, in the case of a model that shifts to the RT1 state that can shift to the RT0 state for transitioning to the RT2 (ART) after the transition to the RT3 state after the transition to the RT3 state that cannot shift directly to the RT2 after the bonus In this case, a period (large number of games) longer than the period (number of games) set for the end of ART may be set for the end of bonus.

  Also, if the slot machine to be set is a model that does not shift to the RT3 state after the bonus ends but shifts to the RT1 state in the same manner as the end of RT2 (advantageous RT), it is set for the end of ART. The same number of games as the period (number of games) to be played may be set for the end of the bonus.

  Note that the slot machine to be set is, for example, a model that is likely to shift to RT2 (advantageous RT) in a shorter period of time than when RT2 (advantageous RT) ends by shifting to the RT0 state after the bonus ends. In this case, if the same number of games as the period (number of games) set for the end of ART is set for the end of the bonus, RT2 (ART) generated again after the end of the bonus is also 1 There is no problem because it comes to be included in the unit.

  Then, after specifying the setting contents in each item on the 1 unit related setting screen, by selecting and inputting a “setting” selection input section provided below the 1 unit related setting screen, the 1 unit related setting screen is selected. One unit related setting information including data that can specify the content selected on the setting screen corresponds to the unit number specified in the item of “Setting Target Unit” (in the case of island, all unit numbers installed on the island) Then, the calling lamp device 200 of the calling lamp ID stored in the game information table today, that is, the calling lamp device installed corresponding to the slot machine 1 of the machine number designated in the item “Setting target table”. 200 and the collection unit 50 of the collection unit ID stored in the game information table today corresponding to the machine number specified in the item “Setting target machine”, ie, Are sent to the collection unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1 of the machine number designated in the item of “setting target machine”, and these 1-unit related setting information is sent to the EEPROM 276 of the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50. And is used in a one-unit determination process described later that is executed in the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50. In the collection unit 50, since there are a plurality of four connected slot machines 1, setting information is stored in association with each of the connected machine numbers.

  Hereinafter, from the slot machine 1 of each model of the present embodiment, it is implemented in the calling lamp device 200 according to the output of the BB signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RT2 signal, door open signal, and error signal. Various processes will be described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS. In the following description, the call lamp device 200 will be described as an example, but the processing other than the processing related to the ART occurrence notification is the same as the processing in the collection unit 50.

  First, the presence or absence of signal change or input of these BB signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RT2 signal, door open signal, and error signal determines whether the interrupt monitoring process shown in FIG. ) 279 (579 in the collection unit 50) is executed and is constantly monitored. Note that the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 performs these interrupt monitoring processes individually for each port simultaneously and in parallel.

  That is, in the interrupt monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not a medal IN signal is input (SK1). If no medal IN signal is input in the determination, the process goes to step SK2. Proceed to determine whether or not a medal OUT signal is input. If there is no medal OUT signal input, the process proceeds to step SK3 to determine whether or not there is a change in the BB signal and RB signal. If there is no change in the BB signal and RB signal in the determination, the process proceeds to step SK4 to determine whether or not the RT2 signal is input (SK4). If there is no input of the RT2 signal in the determination, the process proceeds to step SK5. In step SK5, it is determined whether or not a door opening signal is input. If no door opening signal is input, the process proceeds to step SK6 to determine whether or not an error signal is input (SK6). If no error signal is input in the determination, the process returns to the step SK1 to perform the steps SK1 to SK6, thereby determining whether the medal IN signal is input, whether the medal OUT signal is input, and BB. Whether or not a signal or RB signal is changed, whether or not an RT2 signal is input, whether or not a door opening signal is input, and whether or not an error signal is input are monitored.

  Then, when the medal IN signal is input by starting the game in the corresponding slot machine 1, the input of the medal IN signal is detected in the step SK1, and St1 to St3 shown in FIG. Each process of SK8 to SK11 is performed together with the input process of SK7 including each step.

  In the corresponding slot machine 1, when the medal OUT signal is input to the signal input unit 278e in response to the end of the game and the occurrence of a small role winning or replay, the medal OUT signal is input. Each process of SK9 to SK11 is performed together with the payout related process of SK12 which is detected in the step of SK2 and includes the steps of Sh1 to Sh3 shown in FIG.

  Further, when there is a change in the BB signal and the RB signal, the signal change is detected in the step SK3, and the game state specifying process including the steps S1 to S39 shown in FIG. 56 of SK13 is performed.

  When the RT2 signal is input from the corresponding slot machine 1, the input of the RT2 signal is detected in the step SK4 and the steps SK15 and SK16 are performed.

  Further, in the corresponding slot machine 1, when a door opening signal is input in response to the opening of the entire door, the input of the door opening signal is detected in the step SK5 and the process proceeds to the step SK16. A door opening notification process for notifying in a predetermined lighting manner that the full-face door has been opened in the corresponding slot machine 1 is performed. In the case of the collection unit 50, door opening notification transmission processing for transmitting a door opening notification to the hall computer 140 including the unit ID of the collecting unit 50 and notifying that the entire door has been opened is performed. The

  Further, when an error signal is input due to the occurrence of a payout error or insertion error in the corresponding slot machine 1, the input of the error signal is detected in the step SK6, and the process proceeds to the step SK17. An error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the slot machine 1 in a predetermined lighting mode. In the case of the collection unit 50, an error occurrence notification transmission process is performed in which an error occurrence notification for notifying that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall computer 140, including the unit ID of the collection unit 50. .

  When the medal IN signal is input in the interrupt monitoring process shown in FIG. 51, the input of the medal IN signal is detected at SK1 and the process proceeds to SK7, and the insertion related process shown in FIG. 52 is performed.

  In the insertion related process of SK7 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the number of medals used in the game (number of inserted medals) is specified by the number of pulses constituting the input medal IN signal (St1). ). Specifically, if the number of pulses constituting the medal IN signal is 1 pulse (for example, during bonus), the number of inserted medals is specified as 1, and the number of pulses constituting the medal IN signal is 3 pulses (other than during bonus). For example, the number of inserted medals is specified as 3.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of St2, and the number of inserted medals specified in the step of St1 is added and updated to the total number of inserted medals in the game information table. In addition, the difference medal number is updated with the update of the total inserted medal number.

  Next, proceeding to the step of St3, 1 is added to the total number of games and the number of games between bonuses and updated. If a game number counter is set in the RAM counter, 1 is subtracted from the game counter.

  After the insertion-related processing, the process proceeds to step SK9, where it is determined whether or not a bonus signal (either BB or RB signal) is being input (ON state).

  When these bonus signals are being input, since the gaming state of the corresponding slot machine 1 is either a big bonus or a regular bonus, it is determined whether the latest game table is updated or whether the game is ART. Since there is no need, the process returns to the monitoring state of SK1 to SK6. On the other hand, when the bonus signal is not being input, the process proceeds to step SK10 and the latest game table update process shown in FIG.

  In the latest game table update process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the process is via SK7, that is, whether or not the process is performed in response to an input of a medal IN signal ( Sg1).

  If the process is performed in response to the input of the medal IN signal, it is determined as “Yes” and the process proceeds to the step of Sg2. After the new game is registered in the latest game table, the “game number” of the registered new game is displayed. In the game information table, that is, the game number from the start of today's business start, and the RT signal item stores “0” indicating no input as an initial value. Then, the number of inserted medals specified in St1 of the insertion-related process is stored in the “number of bets” item, the initial value “0” is stored in the “replay” item, and the process ends.

  When the number of games registered in the most recent game table has reached 30 when registering the new game, the number of games registered in the most recent game table is deleted by deleting the oldest game. Is a maximum of 30 games.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sg3 + to determine whether or not the number of payouts of the registration data of the game immediately before the new game remains unregistered. If it is not unregistered, the process is terminated while not registered. If it is, after proceeding to step Sg4 and storing “0” in the number of payouts, based on the number of games to be calculated specified from the ART related setting information, the latest base, the latest replay occurrence rate, the most recent general role The occurrence rate and the latest AT small combination occurrence rate are calculated and stored (Sg6).

  Specifically, for calculating the base and most recent replay occurrence rate, if the base calculation target game number is, for example, an X game, the latest game from the immediately preceding game storing “0” to the number of payouts to the previous X game What is necessary is just to calculate and store a value obtained by multiplying the sum of the “payout number” of the game in the game table by the sum of the “betting number”, and the number of games to be calculated for the replay occurrence rate is also X In the case of a game, the numerator is the number of games that have been replayed before the X game from the game in which “0” is stored in the number of payouts, that is, the game in which “3” is stored in the “number of payouts” item. The replay occurrence rate may be calculated and stored using the denominator as the X game. If the number of games subject to calculation of the general role occurrence rate is also the X game, the game before storing X games from the game storing “0” as the number of payouts Until general It is sufficient to calculate and store the general role occurrence rate with the number of games in which “other than 0” is stored in the item of “number of payouts” as the numerator and the denominator as the X game. If the number of games for which the rate of occurrence is calculated is also an X game, the target small role for the operation notification in ART from the game storing “0” in the number of payouts to the X game, for example, the target small role is a bell. If there is, the number of games in which the number of payouts (for example, 8) by the winning of the bell is stored in the item of “number of payouts” is used as the numerator, and the AT small portion occurrence rate is calculated and stored using the denominator as the X game. .

  Further, when “No” is determined in the step of Sg1, this is a process performed in response to the input of the medal OUT signal via the step of SK12, and the medal OUT signal is output to the latest game table. Since the step of Sg2 has already been performed by the input of the medal IN signal at the start of the game, a new game in which the item “number of payouts” has not been registered is registered. Therefore, the “number of payouts” of the new game is registered. After storing the number of payouts specified in the payout-related processing of SK12 described later (Sg5), the latest base, the most recent replay occurrence rate, the most recent general character occurrence rate, and the most recent AT small character occurrence rate are as described above. Is calculated and stored (Sg6), and the process ends.

  Next, the process proceeds to step SK11, and the ART determination process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. In the ART determination processing of the present embodiment, first, whether the processing performed before the transition is processing for storing the input of the RT2 signal to the most recent game table in step SK14 described later, that is, this ART determination It is determined whether or not the process is a process performed in response to the input of the RT2 signal.

  If it is determined No in step Sr1, that is, if the process is performed in response to the input of the medal IN signal or the medal OUT signal, the process proceeds to step Sr20. If it is determined Yes in step Sr1, that is, If it is performed in response to the input of the RT2 signal, the process proceeds to step Sr2.

  In step Sr2, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at that time (the gaming state currently registered in the gaming information table) is already ART. If it is not ART, the process proceeds to step Sr3. After specifying the ART start condition for determining the start based on the ART related setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 (576), it is determined whether or not the specified ART start condition is satisfied (Sr4).

  As described above, as described in detail in the type ID of the determination condition, these ART start conditions are set differently depending on each model. For example, the latest AT small combination occurrence rate is a predetermined value (threshold) or more. The most recent general combination occurrence rate is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (threshold value), and the most recent replay occurrence rate is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (threshold value). It is determined that the ART start condition is satisfied when the most recent AT small role occurrence rate, the most recent general role occurrence rate, the most recent replay occurrence rate, etc. corresponding to the immediately preceding game is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (threshold). Thus, it is determined that the ART is shifted (started).

  That is, in this embodiment, when the RT2 signal is input, the winning status of the AT small part, the general part, and the replay part in a predetermined period (the period of the number of games to be calculated) before the input of the RT2 signal is displayed. By monitoring in advance using the most recent game table, and determining the ART shift (start) based on the winning situation before the RT2 signal monitored in the most recent game table is input, for example, RT When a transition is made to a state, the RT2 signal is not output, and the RT2 signal is output when a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the RT state is reached. In comparison with the case where the winning situation is monitored and judged in, the judgment of ART transition (start) can be carried out quickly.

  If it is determined in step Sr4 that the ART start condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sr10, the shift determination flag is set, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the number of valid games for validating these transition determination flags is set, and when the number of valid games has elapsed, the transition determination flag is reset and invalidated. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4 that the ART start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sr5, where it is determined that the ART gaming state is started (shifted), and the gaming state in the gaming information table is set to “ART”. After updating and adding 1 to the total number of ARTs and updating, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), “ART occurrence” blinks on the liquid crystal display device 266 constituting the display screen 261, and the light bulb The notification of the occurrence of ART is started with the lighting state of 267 as a predetermined lighting state (for example, flashing in green) corresponding to the time when the ART is generated (Sr5 +). The collection unit 50 does not perform the notification process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sr6, in which the gaming state of the ART determined to be started (transferred) is registered in the gaming state history table and the gaming state history table is updated. Specifically, the number of occurrences (number of times) of the ART that is determined to be the start (transition) on that day is specified by the total number of ARTs in the updated game information table, and the state-specific data is newly added. Additional registration is performed, and “ART”, the number of times, and the time at that time are registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the item “total number of games” specifies that the transition has occurred. The game number of the selected game is stored, and the item “total number of inserted medals” stores the total number of wagers up to the game identified as having been transferred, subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time. In the item “total number of paid-out medals”, a value obtained by subtracting the total number of paid-outs up to the game specified to be transferred from the total number of inserted medals at that time is stored.

  And it progresses to the step of Sr7 and implements 1 unit judgment processing. In this one-unit determination process, whether one unit is continued or not depends on whether the number of games between the ART determined to be started (transferred) and the immediately preceding bonus or ART is within the predetermined number of games set. If it is not a continuation, it is determined that a new unit is started, and is already stored as a unit number in the item “unit” of the state-specific data of ART additionally registered in the gaming state history table. The unit number obtained by adding 1 to the largest number is stored to register the start of a new unit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the unit is a continuation, the “unit” of the additionally registered ART state data In the item, the bonus or ART unit number immediately before is stored, and the continuation of one unit is registered.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sr8, and the ART start condition used for the determination of step Sr4 is type 2 (T2) or type 4 (T4), that is, the ART state is terminated by digesting the prescribed number of games. It is determined whether or not it is a slot machine. If it is of type 2 (T2) or type 4 (T4), the prescribed number of games is set in the number-of-games counter (Sr9), and the process is terminated. If the type is not type 2 (T2) or type 4 (T4), the process ends without setting the game number counter.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr2 that the gaming state at that time is ART, the process proceeds to step Sr11, where it is determined that ART has ended, and the gaming state in the gaming information table is updated to “normal” ( Sr12), the ART occurrence notification started in step Sr5 + is terminated (Sr13).

  Then, the game state data of the finished ART is confirmed, the game state history table is updated (Sr14), and if the game number counter remains in the game number counter, the remaining game is displayed. The number is reset (Sr15), and the process ends.

  Specifically, in this step Sr14, new state-specific data is additionally registered in the game state history table, and “normal” is registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and ART is ended. The next game after the game determined to have been determined, that is, the starting game in the normal state (next game) is specified, and the game number of the specified starting game is stored in the item “total number of games”, The item “medal number” stores the total number of bets until the specified start game is subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time, and the item “total payout medal number” stores the specified start The total of the number of payouts up to the game is subtracted from the total number of medals inserted at that time, and the game unit stores “−” based on the end determination of the game unit described above. The state Necessary data of the state-specific data (ART) immediately before the data (from the difference between the total number of paid out medals and the total number of inserted medals up to that point and the total number of paid out medals and the total number of inserted medals at the start of the ART The total number of paid-out medals and the number of inserted medals during ART are calculated and determined.

  As the gaming state history table is updated, the number of games executed during the completed ART is confirmed. If the number of confirmed games is equal to or greater than the prescribed number of games, the gaming information table is added. ART 1 is added to the number of games, and if the number is less than the prescribed number of games, 1 is added to the number of ARTs without addition in the game information table, and data related to these (such as ART entry rate with addition) is also updated. .

  That is, if the ART start condition is satisfied when the RT2 signal is input, the ART transition (start) is determined at that time, and the number of ARTs and the ART gaming state history are stored. Subsequent game information is counted and managed as having occurred during ART, and when it is satisfied that the RT2 signal, which is the ART end condition for the model that outputs the RT2 signal, is input, the end of ART is determined, Aggregation and management as information related to ART are terminated.

  Note that, as in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the RT2 signal is output after the game is started after RT2 is actually started or ended as shown in FIGS. In addition, the number of ARTs and the gaming state history of ART are stored retroactively before the input of the RT2 signal, and tabulation and management as information related to ART are performed. That is, when the gaming state is not ART and the RT2 signal is received and it is determined that the ART start condition is satisfied, the RT1 signal is ended when the timing at which the RT2 signal is received is at the end of the game. When the game is tabulated and managed as an ART game and immediately after the output of the medal IN signal is completed, the currently executed game and the previous game are tabulated and managed as an ART game. Further, when the RT2 signal is received when the gaming state is ART, when the timing at which the RT2 signal is received is at the end of the game, it is counted that the completed one game is not an ART game. If it is immediately after the output of the medal IN signal is managed, the current game being executed and the previous game are counted and managed as games that are not in ART.

  On the other hand, if Sr1 is No, that is, if the process is performed in response to the input of the medal IN signal or the medal OUT signal, the process proceeds to step Sr20, and is the transition determination flag set in step Sr10 set? Determine whether or not.

  If the transition determination flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sr21, where the ART start condition is specified based on the ART-related setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 (576), and the specified ART start condition is determined. It is determined whether or not

  If the ART start condition is not satisfied, the process is terminated. If the ART start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sr22. After the disclosure time advance process is performed, the process proceeds to step Sr7 described above. .

  In this disclosure timing advance processing, first, it is determined that the gaming state of the ART is started (shifted), the gaming state in the gaming information table is updated to “ART”, and the total ART count is incremented by one and updated. After resetting the in-determination flag, notification that ART has occurred is started.

  Next, the ART gaming state determined to be started (transferred) is registered in the gaming state history table, and the gaming state history table is updated. Specifically, the number of occurrences (number of times) of the ART that is determined to be the start (transition) on that day is specified by the total number of ARTs in the updated game information table, and the state-specific data is newly added. Additional registration is performed, and “ART” and the number of times are stored as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data. In the item “total number of games”, the game having the RT2 signal input most recently is identified from the most recent game table, not the game number of the game identified as having been transferred, and the RT2 signal of the identified RT2 signal is identified. The game number of the game that has been input is stored, and in the item “total number of inserted medals”, the total number of bets up to the game for which the specified RT2 signal has been input is calculated from the total number of inserted medals until the game. In the item “total number of payout medals”, the total number of payouts up to the game in which the specified RT2 signal is input is subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time. .

  That is, when the ART start condition is not satisfied when the RT2 signal is input and the ART start condition is satisfied after that, the time when the ART start condition is satisfied is not set as the ART start time. Assuming that ART is started when the RT2 signal is input, ART starts in the “total number of games”, “total number of inserted medals”, and “total number of paid out medals” items of the ART in the gaming state history table. By storing not the game number at the time when the condition is satisfied but the game number of the game in which the RT2 signal is input, the total number of inserted medals and the total number of paid-out medals in the game in which the RT2 signal is input Regarding models that output RT2 signals (advantageous RT signals) when the RT state starts, the ART start conditions are satisfied from the game in which these RT2 signals are input Payout medals and won medals to the point of games, aggregated gaming state history table as the data corresponding to the ART state, and is managed.

  Note that, as in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the RT2 signal is output after the game is started after RT2 is actually started or ended as shown in FIGS. Contains the number of ARTs and ART gaming state history further before the time when the RT2 signal that triggered the transition determination flag is input, and the total as information about the ART. Management is performed. That is, when the gaming state is not ART, when it is determined that the transition determination flag is set by receiving the RT2 signal and the ART start condition is satisfied, the timing at which the RT2 signal is received is When it is the end time, it is counted and managed as a game in ART from the completed one game, and when it is immediately after the output of the medal IN signal is completed, it is counted and managed as a game in ART from the previous game.

  If it is determined in step Sr20 that the transition determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sr30, and the gaming state at that time (the gaming state currently registered in the gaming information table) is ART. It is determined whether or not there is.

  If the gaming state is not ART, the process proceeds to step Sr31 to determine whether the corresponding slot machine 1 is an RT signal start non-output type model that does not output an RT2 signal corresponding to the start of ART. 576) is determined based on the ART-related setting information stored in 576).

  In the case of the RT signal start non-output type model, the ART start condition for determining the start of the ART is specified based on the ART related setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 (576), and then specified. It is determined whether or not the ART start condition is satisfied. If the ART start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the ART is started, the process proceeds to step Sr5 described above, and the processes after Sr5 are performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SR30 that the gaming state is not ART, or if it is determined No in step Sr31 or step Sr32, the process proceeds to step Sr35, and the corresponding slot machine 1 responds to the end of ART. On the basis of the ART related setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 (576), it is determined whether the model is an RT signal end non-output type that does not output the RT2 signal.

  In the case of the RT signal end non-output type model, the ART end condition for determining the end of the ART is specified based on the ART related setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 (576), and then specified. It is determined whether or not the ART end condition is satisfied. If the ART end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step Sr11 described above, and the processes of Sr11 to Sr15 are performed, while step Sr35 or step Sr36. If it is determined No, the process is terminated.

  As described above in detail with respect to the type ID of the determination condition, these ART end conditions are set differently depending on each model. For example, for a specific falling combination in which the number of payout medals is unique. That a prize has been won, the game number counter is “0”, the latest AT small combination occurrence rate is less than or equal to a predetermined value (threshold), and the most recent general combination occurrence rate is less than or equal to a predetermined value (threshold) In addition, it is determined that the most recent replay occurrence rate is equal to or less than a predetermined value (threshold value), and when these ART termination conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the ART is terminated even if the RT2 signal is not input.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the RT2 signal is output only once at a predetermined timing during the ART period, for example, when two or three games have elapsed since the RT2 state has been reached, and at the end of ART, the RT2 signal is output. Even if it is a model that outputs a RT2 signal when it reaches the specified number of games when it shifts to the state of RT2 and the ART ends when the model that does not output a signal or the specified number of games is set in the ART, The start and end of ART can be accurately determined.

  As described above, by performing the above-described ART determination process in SK11, even when the ART start condition is not satisfied at the time of inputting the RT2 signal, the ART start condition is satisfied when the ART start condition is subsequently satisfied. Transition (start) is determined.

  2 to 30, the T1-1 type that outputs the RT2 signal at the start and end of the RT2 signal, according to the input of the RT2 signal determined as the start RT2 signal. When the input timing is at the end of the game, the game is determined to be ART, and when the input timing is immediately after the medal IN signal is input, it is determined to be ART from the previous game. Further, in response to the input of the RT2 signal determined as the end RT2 signal, when the input timing is the end of the game, it is determined that the ART has ended in the previous game, and when the input timing is immediately after the medal IN signal is input. It is determined that the ART has ended in the previous game. As a result, the medal IN signal input during the period from the game in which the start RT2 signal is input or the previous game to the previous game in which the end RT2 signal is input or the previous game is used as the bet amount during the ART period. Since it is counted as the number of used medals, the number of bets in ART is accurately counted.

  Next, the flow of processing performed when a medal OUT signal is input will be described. First, the payout related processing shown in FIG. Is implemented.

  In the payout-related processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, first, the number of medals paid out (number of payout medals) is specified by the number of pulses constituting the input medal OUT signal. Specifically, if the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 1 pulse, the number of payout medals is specified as 1. If the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 3 pulses, the number of payout medals is specified as 3. If the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 5, the number of payout medals is specified as 5, and if the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 8 pulses, the number of payout medals is specified as 8, and the medal OUT signal is specified. If the number of configured pulses is 10, the number of payout medals is specified as 10 (Sh1).

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sh2, and the number of payout medals specified in the step of Sh1 is added and updated to the total number of payout medals in the game information table. In addition, the difference medal number is updated with the update of the total payout medal number.

  Next, the process proceeds to the step of Sh3, and occurrence of a small combination corresponding to the number of payout medals specified in the step of Sh1 is specified.

  Then, after the payout-related processing of SK12 is performed, the process proceeds to the above-described step SK9, and the processing of steps SK9 to SK11 shown in FIG. 51 is performed.

  In other words, when the bonus is not in effect, the latest game table update process of SK10 and the ART determination process of SK11 are performed not only when a winning occurs and a medal OUT signal is input, but also when a medal OUT signal is not generated. Even if is not input, it is implemented in response to the medal IN signal being input in the next game.

  Next, the processing flow when there is a change in the BB signal and the RB signal will be described. When there is a change in the BB signal and the RB signal, the change is detected in the step SK3 and the process proceeds to SK13. The gaming state specifying process shown in FIG. 56 is performed.

  In the game state specifying process of Sk13 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, first, by performing step S1, it is specified whether the changed signal is a BB signal or an RB signal. . If “No” in S1, it corresponds to a change in the RB signal.

  If the changed signal is a BB signal, “Yes” is determined in step S1, and the process proceeds to step S2, where the change in the BB signal is changed from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state. That is, it is determined whether or not the input state of the BB signal after the change is “ON”.

  In the determination, if the change in the BB signal is not a change from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state, that is, if the input state of the BB signal after the change is in the “OFF” state, the process proceeds to step S31. On the other hand, if the input state of the BB signal after the change is “ON”, the process proceeds to step S3, and it is specified that a special prize accompanying the shift to the big bonus has occurred in the corresponding slot machine 1.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S4, where it is determined whether or not the gaming state at that time, that is, the gaming state in which the big bonus has occurred is ART, and if it is not ART, the process proceeds to step S7 while if it is ART. In step S5, it is determined that the occurrence of the big bonus is the end of the ART, the game state data of the ended ART is confirmed, the game state history table is updated, and the number of games is displayed in the game number counter. If the set remains, the remaining number of games is reset (S6).

  Specifically, in this step S5, the necessary data of the latest state-specific data (ART) in the game state history table (the total number of paid-out medals and the total number of inserted medals up to that point and the total paid-out medal at the start of the ART) The total payout medals and the number of inserted medals in the ART are calculated and determined from the difference between the number and the total number of inserted medals.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S7, the game state in the game information table is updated to “BB (Big Bonus)”, 1 is added to the number of BB occurrences, and related data such as the BB occurrence rate is updated and the call is made. In the case of the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the lamp device 200, BB generation notification is started.

  Then, new state-specific data is additionally registered in the game state history table, and “BB (Big Bonus)” is registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the ART or normal state is ended. The game determined to be or the next game, that is, the big bonus start game (the next game determined to have ended) is specified, and the game number of the specified start game is stored in the item “total number of games” In the “total number of inserted medals” item, the total number of wagers up to the specified starting game is subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time. Then, a value obtained by subtracting the total number of payouts up to the specified start game from the total number of inserted medals at that time is stored (step S8). Note that “0” indicating indefinite is stored in the game unit, and the data of the game unit is updated in a one-unit determination process in step S21 described later.

  Next, proceeding to S20, the number of games between bonuses is determined, the number of games between bonuses is stored as the newly determined number of games between bonuses, and the count value of the number of games between bonuses is reset, and then the diagram of step S21. 1 unit determination processing shown in 57 is performed.

  By executing the one-unit determination process, the game unit data of “0” described above is a predetermined number of games (including occurrence during ART) in which the occurrence of big bonus is preset from the end of ART. In such a case, the same unit data as the value of the game unit of the ART is stored, and when a predetermined number of games have passed since the end of the ART, it is determined that the new game unit is started, and the finished ART Unit data obtained by adding 1 to the value of the game unit is stored.

  If the changed signal is an RB signal and the determination in step S1 is “No”, it is determined in step S11 whether or not the BB signal is in an ON state, that is, whether or not an RB during a big bonus is generated. If the BB signal is in the ON state, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the BB signal is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S12, and the change in the RB signal is changed from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state. It is determined whether the change is a transition, that is, whether the input state of the RB signal after the change is “ON”.

  In the determination, if the change in the RB signal is not a change from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state, that is, if the input state of the RB signal after the change is in the “OFF” state, the process proceeds to step S31. On the other hand, when the input state of the RB signal after the change is the “ON” state, the process proceeds to step S13, and it is specified that a special prize accompanying the transition to the regular bonus has occurred in the corresponding slot machine 1.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S14, where it is determined whether or not the game state at that time, that is, the game state in which the regular bonus has occurred is ART, and if it is not ART, the process proceeds to step S17 while if it is ART. In step S15, the generation of the regular bonus is determined to be the end of the ART, the game state data of the completed ART is confirmed, the game state history table is updated, and the number of games is displayed in the game number counter. If the set remains, the remaining number of games is reset (S16).

  Specifically, in this step S15, necessary data of the latest state-specific data (ART) in the gaming state history table (the total number of paid-out medals and the total number of inserted medals up to that point and the total paid-out medal at the start of the ART) The total payout medals and the number of inserted medals in the ART are calculated and determined from the difference between the number and the total number of inserted medals.

  In step S17, the game state in the game information table is updated to “RB (regular bonus)”, and then 1 is added to the number of RB occurrences and related data such as the RB occurrence rate is updated and the call is made. In the case of the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the lamp device 200, RB generation notification is started.

  Then, new state-specific data is additionally registered in the game state history table, and “RB (regular bonus)” is registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the ART or normal state is ended. Or the next game, that is, the start game of the regular bonus (the game following the game determined to have ended) is specified, and the game number of the specified start game is stored in the item “total number of games” In the “total number of inserted medals” item, the total number of wagers up to the specified starting game is subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time. Then, a value obtained by subtracting the total number of payouts up to the specified start game from the total number of inserted medals at that time is stored (step S18). Note that “0” indicating indefinite is stored in the game unit, and the data of the game unit is updated in a one-unit determination process in step S21 described later.

  Next, proceeding to S20, the number of games between bonuses is determined, the number of games between bonuses is stored as the newly determined number of games between bonuses, and the count value of the number of games between bonuses is reset, and then the diagram of step S21. 1 unit determination processing shown in 57 is performed.

  By executing the one-unit determination process, the game unit data of “0” described above is a predetermined number of games (including the occurrence during ART) in which the regular bonus is generated in advance from the end of ART. In such a case, the same unit data as the value of the game unit of the ART is stored, and when a predetermined number of games have passed since the end of the ART, it is determined that the new game unit is started, and the finished ART Unit data obtained by adding 1 to the value of the game unit is stored.

  Next, the processing after the step of S31 performed when the BB signal and the RB signal are changed from ON to OFF, that is, when the bonus is ended will be described.

  When the BB signal and the RB signal (except when the BB signal is ON) change from ON to OFF, as described above, the change of these signals is determined in each step of S2 and S12, and the step of S31 is performed. The process after step S31 is performed.

  First, in step S31, it is determined that the big bonus (from S2) or the regular bonus (from S12) ends, and the data of the ended big bonus or regular bonus is determined.

  Specifically, based on the difference between the required data (big bonus or regular bonus) of the latest state-specific data (big bonus or regular bonus) in the gaming status history table and the total number of games at the start of the big bonus or regular bonus. The total number of medals in the bonus is calculated based on the difference between the total number of medals and total inserted medals up to that point, and the total number of medals and total inserted medals at the start of the big bonus or regular bonus. The number of medals paid out and the number of inserted medals are calculated and determined. In the case of the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the calling lamp device 200, the BB generation notification is terminated.

  Then, the ART determination process in step S34 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the ART is started based on whether the end of the big bonus or the regular bonus satisfies the ART start condition (step S35).

  If it is determined that the ART has started (Yes in step S35), the gaming state in the gaming information table is updated to “ART”, and after updating by adding 1 to the total number of ARTs, a notification that an ART has occurred is issued. Start. The collection unit 50 does not perform the notification process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S37, where the gaming state history of the ART determined to be started (transferred) is registered in the gaming state history table and the gaming state history table is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S21 and the one unit determination process is performed. As a result, the unit is determined to be the same unit as the big bonus or regular bonus after the ART is finished.

  Specifically, in this step S37, the number of occurrences (the number of times) of the ART that is determined to be the start (transition) on that day is specified by the total number of ARTs in the updated game information table, and by state Data is newly registered, and “ART” and the number of times and the time at that time are registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered data according to the state. The game number of the game identified as having been transferred is stored, and the item “total number of inserted medals” is obtained by subtracting the total number of wagers up to the game identified as transferred from the total number of inserted medals at that time. In the item “total number of paid-out medals”, a value obtained by subtracting the total number of paid-outs up to the game identified as the transition from the total number of inserted medals at that time is stored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART is not started (No in step S35), the gaming state in the gaming information table is updated to “normal” (step S38), and the normal gaming state is registered in the gaming state history table. Update the gaming state history table. Specifically, the normal state-specific data is additionally registered, “normal” and the time at that time are registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the “total number of games” The item of the game identified as having transitioned to the normal is stored in the item, and the total number of bets up to the game identified as transitioned in the item of “total inserted medals” The number subtracted from the number of inserted medals is stored, and the item “total number of paid out medals” stores the total number of paid-outs up to the game identified as the transition, subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time. (Step S39), the process is terminated.

  Here, the one unit determination process of the present embodiment performed in step S21 will be described below. In the one unit determination process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, the game state at that time is shifted to. It is determined from the gaming state history table whether or not the previous gaming state is a normal state.

  If the gaming state before the transition is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step St7, where it is determined that one unit is continued, and the previous state is added to the data of the gaming unit of the latest state-specific data in the gaming state history table. The game unit data identical to the game unit data of the other data is stored, and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state before the transition is the normal state, the process proceeds to step St2, and it is determined from the gaming state history table whether the gaming state before entering the normal state is ART.

  If the game state before entering the normal state is ART, the process proceeds to step St3, and the number of games in the normal state after the end of ART is set for the end of ART on the one-unit related setting screen. It is further determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the number of determination games. If it is not equal to or greater than the number of continuation determination games, the process proceeds to step St7 to determine unit continuation, and the gaming state and the previous normal state The same unit data as the latest ART unit is stored in the unit data.

  On the other hand, if the number of continuation determination games is equal to or greater, the process proceeds to step St4, where it is determined that a new unit starts, and unit data obtained by adding 1 to the unit of the latest ART is classified by the state of the game state Store in the unit data of the data (latest state-specific data) (St4), and store “-” data indicating that one unit has been completed by the transition to the normal state in the most recent normal state unit data (Step St5), the process is terminated.

  If the game state before entering the normal state is not ART, that is, if the game state before entering the normal state is BB or RB, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the bonus state is 1 It is further determined whether or not the number of continuation determination games set for the end of the bonus on the unit related setting screen is greater than or equal to the number of continuation determination games. If not, the process proceeds to step St7 to continue the unit. It is determined that the same unit data as the most recent bonus unit is stored in the unit data in the gaming state and the previous normal state, and the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number is more than the continuation determination game, the process proceeds to step St4, where it is determined that a new unit starts, and unit data obtained by adding 1 to the unit of the latest bonus state is used as the state of the gaming state. Store in unit data of another data (latest state-specific data) (St4), and store “-” data indicating that one unit has been completed by the transition of the normal state in the most recent normal unit data (Step St5), and the process ends.

  That is, in this embodiment, even if a new advantageous state (ART or bonus) occurs after the normal state is reached after the end of ART, the number of games in the normal state is set with respect to the end of ART. If it is less than the number of continuation determination games, it is determined that one unit is continued, and even if a new advantageous state (ART or bonus) occurs after the bonus has ended and the normal state occurs, the game in the normal state When the number is less than the number of continuation determination games set for the end of the bonus, it is determined that one unit is continued.

  Therefore, as the number of continuation determination games used for one unit of continuation determination, the number of games that differ between the end of ART and the end of bonus, for example, as described above, By setting a game number longer than the continuation determination game number of games, even if the slot machine is of a model in which the ART state does not occur unless the gaming state is increased after the bonus, It can be determined accurately.

  Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen 261 of the call lamp device 200 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The display screen 261 of the call lamp device 200 according to the present embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, normally, a normal screen including the base data of the corresponding slot machine 1 is displayed.

  The base data in the normal screen is displayed based on today's data aggregated in the game information table, and the total number of games of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “total number of games”. The number of BBs of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “Number of BBs”, the number of RBs of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “RBs”, and today in association with the display of “Number of games between B”. The number of games between data bonuses is displayed, and a value obtained by dividing the number of BBs of today's data by the total number of games of today's data in association with the display of “BB probability” is displayed in a fractional format. A value obtained by dividing the number of RBs of today's data by the total number of games of today's data is displayed in a fractional format in association with the display.

  In the lower display area of the display screen 261, input menus of “next data”, “previous day”, “previous day”, and “call” are displayed at positions corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d, respectively. It has become so.

  In the input menu, when the input button 255d corresponding to the “call” menu is operated, the light bulb 267 is controlled to be turned on to notify the staff of the call.

  In addition, when the input button 255b corresponding to the “previous day” menu is operated in the input menu, or when the input button 255c corresponding to the “previous day” menu is operated, the previous day data in the game information table is displayed. In addition, table data (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, BB probability, RB probability) based on the previous day data is displayed.

  In addition, when the input button 255a corresponding to the “next data” menu is operated in the input menu, the base data 3 screen including the base data related to one unit based on each data of the game information table, etc. A table data display process for displaying each unit data screen is performed in the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, whereby each unit data screen is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the table data 2 screen of the present embodiment includes the total number of ART occurrences in the current day data counted in the game information table, the average number of games in the ART, and the maximum game in the ART. Data such as the number, the minimum number of games in the ART, and the total ART probability are displayed.

  The table data 2 screen is composed of a plurality of screens. By selecting the “next” display provided at the bottom of the table data 2 screen, the current data collected in the game information table is displayed. Various data, such as the number of ART occurrences with addition, the number of occurrences of ART without addition, the ART probability with addition, the ART probability without addition, the ART entry rate with addition, etc., are displayed.

  In addition, in the unit data 3 screen, 1 unit average ART number, 1 unit maximum ART number, 1 unit minimum ART number, 1 unit average acquisition, which are data related to 1 unit in today's data aggregated in the game information table Data such as the number of coins, the average payout amount per unit, etc. are displayed, and by selecting the next data, it is possible to specify the distribution of 1 unit based on the data of the gaming state history table and each gaming state included in each unit A simple graph is displayed.

  Next, the processing performed in the collection unit 50 of this embodiment will be summarized. As described above, the processing performed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 is performed by displaying the display screen 261 in the calling lamp device 200. This is basically the same as the above-described processes executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 in the call lamp apparatus 200, except that there is no process related to the above and the lighting process of the call lamp (running lighting, etc.). .

  That is, the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 also has four individual tasks assigned to each port for the interrupt monitoring process shown in FIG. 51, similarly to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 in the calling lamp device 200. , The interrupt monitoring process for each of the four ports from the first port 581 to the fourth port 584, and each of the above-described SK7 to SK17, which is performed in association with the interrupt monitoring process. Processing can be performed independently.

  As described above, the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 converts the above-described processing for each port into setting information corresponding to the serial number connected to each port, ART related setting information, one unit setting information, and the like. The game information stored in the game information table corresponding to the machine number of the slot machine 1 connected to each port and the game state history table corresponding to the machine number are executed. 39 is updated, the game information of today's data in the game information table in the calling lamp device 200 and the same data as the game state history of today's data in the game status history table in the calling lamp device 200 are updated. As shown in FIG. 40, the information is stored and managed in the game information table and the game state history table of the collection unit 50.

  Each game information stored in and managed in the game information table and the game state history table of these collection units 50 and the game state history (data for each state) are as shown in FIG. 37 (b). Information information (transmission data string 1) and game state history data (transmission data string 2) are transmitted to the hall computer 140, and each game information of the corresponding machine number in the game information table is received today in response to reception of the game information data. Is updated, and update is performed by additionally registering the game number in the table-specific gaming state history table (today) in response to the reception of the gaming state history data.

  Each game information managed in the game information table of the hall computer 140 in this way is subjected to a predetermined display operation in the hall computer 140. Specifically, the slot machine for which the base data is to be displayed. By performing the designation operation of one unit number, each game information stored in the gaming information table today in association with the designated unit number and the gaming state history stored in the individual gaming state history table Each information is displayed on the table-based game information screen shown in FIG. 59 and the table-based game status screen shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the game information screen according to the table of the present embodiment includes each game information managed in association with the machine number of the slot machine selected as the display target in the game information table today. Total number of inserted medals, total paid-out medals, difference medals, total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, total number of ARTs, number of ARTs without addition, number of ARTs with addition, and total number of games Total ART probabilities displayed in a fractional format with the value divided by the number of ARTs as the denominator, and no additional ART displayed in a fractional format with the value divided by the number of ARTs as the denominator. Probability and the total number of games are added and the value divided by the number of ARTs is displayed in a fractional format with the denominator as the denominator and the probability of adding and the addition obtained by dividing the number of ARTs with additions by the total number of ARTs RT entry rate, the average number of games played during the ART period, the average number of games during ART, the maximum number of games during ART, the minimum number of games during ART, and the average number of payouts during ART Maximum number of payouts during ART, minimum number of payouts during ART, average number of acquisitions during ART, maximum number of acquisitions during ART, minimum number of acquisitions during ART, one unit average number of ARTs, one unit The maximum ART number, the one unit minimum ART number, the one unit average earned number, the one unit average payout number, the number of games between bonuses, and the number of medals earned in each unit are displayed in a list. It has become. Note that the number of medals obtained in each unit is the unit status data stored in association with the machine number of the slot machine selected as the display target in the table-specific gaming state history table (today). The total is calculated by calculating the total number of difference medals in the game state history (state data) in which the same numerical values are stored in the data.

  These table-specific game information screens are based not only on today's data but also on the previous day game information table, the previous day game information table, the individual game state history table (previous day) and the individual game state history table (previous day). Thus, the game information screen for the previous day and the day before the previous day can also be displayed on the hall computer 140.

  In addition, when a predetermined display operation is performed in the hall computer 140, the stand-by gaming state screen shown in FIG. 60 is displayed, and the gaming state at that time of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall is displayed. Can be grasped.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the layout screen of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall is displayed on the stand-by gaming state screen of this embodiment, and the display color of each slot machine 1 is displayed. Thus, it is displayed whether the gaming state of each slot machine 1 is BB, RB, ART, or normal state.

  Specifically, the gaming state of each slot machine 1 is specified based on the gaming state data stored in the gaming state table in association with the machine number of each slot machine today, and the gaming state is a big bonus (BB). Is red, regular bonus (RB) is yellow, ART is green, and normal is white.

  In addition, when there is a change in the game state during display of the game state screen for each table, the color display of the changed table blinks so that it can be easily recognized that the change has occurred. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the hall computer 140 displays the game information screen for each player and the game state screen for each player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other than these screens, a call lamp As in the table data screen 3 in the device 200, a graph or the like indicating the occurrence state of the game state generated in each table may be displayed, or a screen for displaying other table data is displayed. You may do it.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the slot machine 1 that uses medals and credits as game value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (pachinko balls) are used as these game machines. The game machine may be a slot machine that plays games, and game media such as pachinko balls and medals are encapsulated inside the game machine and given according to the number of pachinko balls and medals lent out and the winnings. The number of pachinko balls and medals that have been added is added, while the number of pachinko balls and medals used in games is subtracted and stored, and without using pachinko balls or medals, The value such as the points and points lent out according to the value and the value such as the points and points given according to the winnings are all stored as credits, and the value stored as credits Only it may be a game machine capable of performing a game using.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the model of type 1-type 5 is illustrated as an object model which determines the start and completion | finish of ART, this invention is not limited to this, These types 1-5 Other models may be used as the target model, and in this case, the determination condition may be set to be selectable according to the specifications of the slot machine as the target model.

  In the embodiment, the hall computer 140 sets the determination conditions for each model, the number of continuous determination games for one unit, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and the various As described above, all or a part of the settings may be set for each calling lamp device 200 or each collecting unit 50 by operating the dip switch 277 of the calling lamp device 200 or the remote controller described above. For example, the setting contents set in one calling lamp device 200 or the collection unit 50 on one gaming island are set in correspondence with the slot machine 1 of the same model (type) on the gaming island. The same setting may be performed by transmitting to the calling lamp device 200 or the collection unit 50.

  In the above embodiment, the type of the small combination generated in the slot machine 1 is exemplified based on the medal OUT signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these small combinations When the type is, for example, a slot machine that outputs a replay signal when a replay winning occurs, or a slot machine that outputs an AT small role signal when winning an AT small role (for example, Bell), The type of the generated small combination may be specified in accordance with the output of the replay signal or the AT small combination signal.

  Moreover, in the said Example, as the calling lamp apparatus 200 which is an information display apparatus, the control unit 300 mounted with the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 which implements various processes etc., and the liquid crystal display device 266 which displays various information However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control unit 300 can be disposed in the vicinity of the slot machine 1. For example, the control unit 300 and the display unit 209 may be integrated.

  In the embodiment, the signal output from the slot machine 1 is input to the collecting unit 50, and the collecting unit 50 transmits the table game information data to the hall computer 140 via the relay terminal 60. In this way, it is preferable because the processing load for determining whether or not the determination condition is satisfied in each slot machine 1 can be distributed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, information of signals output from the slot machine 1 is collected by the hall computer 140, and it is determined whether the determination condition is satisfied on the hall computer 140 side (ART determination processing), one unit determination processing, etc. May be performed for each slot machine.

  In the above embodiment, in the case of a model that outputs the RT2 signal at the end of the ART, the end of the ART is determined when the end RT2 signal is output (the RT2 signal is output as the end condition). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the final RT2 signal is output, for example, the general character occurrence rate for the N game after the input of the RT2 signal is The ART is completed at the time of input of the RT2 signal in response to satisfying the condition that the probability is less than Q or that the N game occurrence rate is less than the probability P for the N game after the input. You may make it judge. In addition, as in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the RT2 signal is output after the game after the RT2 is actually ended as shown in FIGS. The occurrence rate of the general combination is less than the probability Q for the N games including the game (the previous game or the game after the previous game) to which the RT2 signal is input, or the occurrence rate of the AT small combination is less than the probability P. When the conditions such as the above are satisfied, it may be determined that the ART has ended after going back to the game before the game in which the RT2 signal is input (previous game or game before the previous game).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RT2 signal having the same signal form is output to the same signal line at the start and end of ART in order to correspond to the conventional calling lamp device 200 and hall computer 140 with a small number of terminals capable of inputting signals. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine capable of outputting a signal at the start and an end signal to different signal lines, or the same signal Even if it is a line, a slot machine that outputs RT2 signals having different signal forms at the start and end signals may be set as a determination target. In this case, the start or end is due to different signal lines. It is only necessary to determine whether the signal is a start or an end depending on whether the signal form is a start signal form or an end signal form.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the form which calculates the latest AT small part occurrence rate, the latest general combination occurrence rate, etc. in advance in the most recent game table is illustrated, and in this way, the determination can be performed quickly. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the number of bets of the most recent game stored in the most recent game table at the time when the determination is made, such as the most recent AT small role occurrence rate and the most recent general role occurrence rate, etc. Alternatively, the determination may be performed by calculation based on the number of payouts or the like.

  In the above embodiment, the advantageous RT signal is referred to as the RT2 signal because it is output in the RT2 state, which is the advantageous RT in the slot machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The name of the RT2 signal may be changed according to the specifications of the slot machine.

  Further, in the above embodiment, only the total number of ARTs, which is the number of times determined as assisting ART, is counted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an advantageous RT signal (RT2) is output. In the case of the model to be used, the total number of RTs is also counted based on the number of times the advantageous RT signal (RT2) is output, and the ART entry rate that is the ratio of the total number of ARTs to the total number of RTs is calculated and displayed. You may do it.

  In addition, in the embodiment, in FIGS. 46 to 50, the fall of the navigation effect for avoiding the winning of the falling combination is completed together with the navigation effect for winning the AT small combination by finishing the AT control. For the model in which a winning combination is generated and the replay time (RT) state also ends, the conditions for starting and ending the ART are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, If the model is of a type in which the AT control is terminated by the winning of the fallen role and the navigation effect is terminated, but the replay time (RT) state is not terminated, the winning of the AT small character that is the target of the navigation effect in the AT control is won. If the probability is greater than or equal to the predetermined P value, the condition for the transition (start), and the winning combination probability of the AT small role is less than or equal to the predetermined Q value (P value ≧ Q value) Transition (start) It is sufficient to determine the end.

  In the above embodiment, the input period for determining that the advantageous RT signal (RT2 signal) is input is not set in step Sk4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous RT signal ( The input period of the (RT2 signal) may be set according to the portable output of the advantageous RT signal (RT2 signal) from the corresponding slot machine. That is, as shown in FIG. 28, if the slot machine is a model having a function of outputting an advantageous RT signal (RT2 signal) for at least 2000 milliseconds so as to be compatible with an old management device or the like, it is 2000 milliseconds. If the slot machine is a model that does not have a function that can handle an old management device or the like and that outputs an advantageous RT signal (RT2 signal) for a short period of time, for example, 100 milliseconds, The input period corresponding to the 100 milliseconds may be set.

  Further, according to the embodiment, when the operation mode for winning the special replay role is not notified by the navigation effect, the navigation effect is not performed when the special replay role is accidentally won and the RT2 state is entered ( Even if it is a slot machine in which the RT2 state is finished immediately after winning the fallen role by not involving the notification game state), even if the RT2 signal is output by shifting to the RT2, the navigation effect is not performed ( Since the AT small combination occurrence rate, which is a predetermined condition, does not exceed the P value by not involving the notification game state), it is not determined to be ART (advantageous game state with the notification game state), so these accidental special replays Even if the winning combination is made into the RT2 state, it is possible to prevent the data related to ART such as the number of ARTs from becoming inaccurate.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the RT2 signal is output after the next game is newly started after the output of the RT2 signal is started, and the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal are output. Since the output of the RT2 signal is continued until a specific timing that is not included in the period is reached, the time required for the external device such as the calling lamp device 200 to receive the RT2 signal is inhibited from progressing the game. We can secure without. In addition, since the output of the RT2 signal is not stopped while outputting the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, etc., the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, etc. received on the external device side such as the calling lamp device 200 are not received. It is possible to easily identify whether the signal is normal or RT2.

  (2) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the RT2 signal can be output when the special replay winning that is the control trigger to the normal / RT2 is established and the control to the normal / RT2 is started. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately specify the control timing for normal / RT2 on the external device side.

  In addition, when there is a slight difference between the special replay winning timing and the timing for starting the control to normal / RT2 in relation to the interrupt processing (for example, it is determined as a special replay winning in one interrupt processing, In the case where control to normal / RT2 is started in the next interrupt process), the RT2 signal may be output at the time of special replay winning.

  (3) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the RT2 signal is output for at least a predetermined period (2 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the RT2 signal even in an old external device that requires a relatively long time to detect the RT2 signal.

  (4) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Sk110 to Sk113 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26, and FIG. 28, a new start is started until 2000 ms elapses after the output of the RT2 signal is started. When the played game is finished, the output of the RT2 signal is finished when the output of the medal IN signal, which is different from that at the end of the game at the specific timing, is completed. Therefore, the RT2 signal can be reliably detected in the external device, and the received medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, etc. are normal / RT2 depending on whether the detection timing is a specific timing or a predetermined timing different from the specific timing. It is possible to clearly specify whether or not the signal is in the range.

  Note that the specific timing and the game end time are not necessarily the same, and a slight deviation may occur. For example, it may be determined that the next game has actually ended in one interrupt process and determined to have reached a specific timing in the next interrupt process.

  (5) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Sa14, Sa16, FIG. 27, and the like in FIG. 21, when the power interruption is restored during the RT2 signal output, the RT2 signal is at least for a predetermined period after the restoration. Is output. For this reason, even if a power interruption occurs during the output of the RT2 signal, the RT2 signal can be reliably received on the external device side after the return.

  (6) In the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, as shown in Sa15, Sa16, FIG. 27, etc. in FIG. The RT2 signal is output over a predetermined period. For this reason, it is possible to specify whether or not the game state after power interruption recovery is normal / RT2 on the external device side, and even if the normal / RT2 of the previous day returns when opening the store, The normal RT2 can be recognized as today's normal RT2.

  (7) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the RT2 signal is output even at the end of normal / RT2. For this reason, the end time of normal / RT2 can be specified on the external device side.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modified examples applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the slot machine 1 in the embodiment described above, the example in which the RT2 signal is output when the special replay winning that is the control trigger for the normal / RT2 has been described, but the trigger for outputting the RT2 signal is as follows: This is not a limitation. A specific example will be described below.

    (A) After the start of the normal / RT2, when a winning combination of a role that is highly likely to be derived only in the above-described AT (a role that is very unlikely to appear if there is no navigation effect in the normal / RT2) is established, Outputs the RT2 signal. As a result, the external device side can identify that it is highly likely that it is controlled by the AT in addition to the normal / RT2 by receiving the RT2 signal.

    (B) After the start of normal / RT2, when the above-mentioned AT is absent, the control to normal / RT2 is still continued when the number of specific games more than the expected value of the number of games for which normal / RT2 ends is elapsed. When it is determined that the RT2 signal is detected, the RT2 signal may be output. Further, after the start of normal / RT2, the RT2 signal may be output when the number of medals larger than the expected number of medals that can be expected when the above-mentioned AT is absent is obtained. Good. As a result, the external device side can identify that it is highly likely that it is controlled by the AT in addition to the normal / RT2 by receiving the RT2 signal.

    (C) Even if the special replay is in the game state other than normal / RT0, it can be won in the internal lottery (excluding bonus and simultaneous winning), and it can be controlled to normal / RT2 by winning special replay at normal / RT0. Thus, the RT2 signal is output only when the special replay winning is established in the normal / RT0 in the slot machine which is not controlled by the normal / RT2 even if the special replay winning is performed in the gaming state other than the normal / RT0. As a result, even when the RT2 signal is output only when the special replay winning is established in the state controlled to normal / RT0, the combination of winning combinations to be selected by the internal lottery according to the gaming state Alternatively, the degree of freedom in designing the type can be expanded.

  (2) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RT2 signal is output every time in relation to the control to the normal RT2 has been described. However, during AT and normal / RT2, if AT and normal / RT2 are interrupted due to a player's operation error or bonus winning, etc., it is possible to transfer to AT and normal / RT2 again. In this case, however, the RT2 signal is transmitted to the series of ATs a plurality of times, and the external device cannot accurately grasp the initial number of ATs. Therefore, the RT2 signal may be output only once during a series of ATs. A series of ATs refers to, for example, the AT of 50 games corresponding to the Navistock 1 until the AT determined to be controlled by the sub-control unit 91 from the first AT, or the incubation period or game A concept that includes non-AT controlled by a user's operation error. A specific example will be described below.

    (A) During normal / RT2, depending on the operation procedure, a lottery for a specific lottery target that can win the first winning combination (for example, lower replay) or the second winning combination (for example, normal replay) Until the RT2 signal is output once after being controlled by the AT (that is, until the lower stage replay wins once), it suggests an operation procedure that can win the first winning combination when winning a specific winning combination. A navigation effect that suggests an operation procedure that can win the second winning combination when a specific lottery winning combination is won in a series of ATs for which the RT2 signal has already been output. The RT2 signal may be output when one winning combination wins. When configured in this way, the RT2 signal is not output when normal / RT2 is completed. More specific description will be given below.

  For example, the replay GR41, the replay GR42, the replay GR43, and the replay GR44 are included as the lottery target combination of the normal / RT2 in the embodiment described above. Replay GR41 is normal replay + lower replay, replay GR42 is normal replay + lower replay + special replay, replay GR43 is normal replay + lower replay + fall replay, and replay GR44 is It is assumed that normal replay + lower replay + promotion replay 1. In normal / RT2, the lottery probability is determined so that the replay GR41, the replay GR42, the replay GR43, and the replay GR44 are won with high probability.

  In addition, when one of the replay GR41, the replay GR42, the replay GR43, and the replay GR44 is won, either the normal replay or the lower replay is surely awarded according to the operation procedure (stop operation timing, stop order). As described above, the reel control is performed, and in particular, the operation procedure for winning the lower stage replay is determined so as to differ depending on which of the replay GR41, the replay GR42, the replay GR43, and the replay GR44 is won. The main control unit 41 outputs the RT2 signal by winning the lower stage replay in normal / RT2.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 indicates a special navigation effect that suggests an operation procedure for winning the lower replay when it is determined that one of the replay GR41 to the replay GR44 is won in the normal / RT2 during a series of ATs. When the lower stage replay wins, the RT2 signal output completion flag is set, and when it is determined that one of the replay GR41 to the replay GR44 is selected in the normal / RT2 in the series of ATs, the RT2 signal When the output completion flag is set, a special navigation effect that suggests an operation procedure for winning a normal replay without winning a lower replay is executed.

  By configuring as described above, when one of the replay GR41 to the replay GR44 is won during a series of ATs, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the RT2 signal output completion flag is set. When the RT2 signal output completion flag is not set, the operation procedure for winning the lower stage replay is suggested and the lower stage replay is awarded. As a result, the RT2 signal is output, whereas the RT2 signal output completion flag is set. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the RT2 signal from being output by suggesting an operation procedure for winning the normal replay and making the normal replay win. That is, the RT2 signal is output only once during a series of ATs.

  Thus, whether or not to output the RT2 signal from the main control unit 41 can be controlled based on whether or not the RT2 signal has already been output during the series of ATs by the sub-control unit 91. For this reason, the number of times controlled by a series of ATs in the external device can be accurately recognized.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to notify the operation procedure determined by the main control unit 41 according to whether or not the RT2 signal needs to be output to the outside, and the main control unit 41 performs the lower stage replay. Since the RT2 signal is output to the outside based on the winning, information indicating the accurate control state of the sub-control unit 91 can be output to the outside. Therefore, since the main control unit 41 can also output the control state of the sub-control unit 91 to the outside, even if it is the control state of the sub-control unit 91 without complicating the signal path for external output, It can be accurately transmitted outside the slot machine.

  When a series of ATs is an AT of 50 games corresponding to Navistock 1, an RT2 signal can be output once corresponding to Navistock 1, and as a result, Navistock 1 can be output from an external device. It is possible to accurately recognize the number of times controlled by the AT corresponding to.

  The replay GR41, the replay GR42, the replay GR43, and the replay GR44 are drawn only in the normal / RT2, and the lower replay may be won (or won) only in the normal / RT2. . As a result, the main control unit 41 performs the control to output the RT2 signal uniformly when the lower stage replay winning is established without determining whether or not the normal / RT2 is in progress. The RT2 signal can be output only in the controlled state and when the lower stage replay winning is established.

  On the other hand, the lower replay may be one that can win (or win) even in a game state other than normal / RT2. In this case, when the lower replay winning is established, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not it is normal / RT2 and outputs the RT2 signal on the condition that it is normal / RT2. Good. As a result, even when the RT2 signal is output only when the lower stage replay winning is established in a state controlled to normal / RT2, the determination result that can be determined by the predetermining means according to the gaming state is designed. The degree of freedom can be expanded.

    (B) In normal / RT2, when a predetermined winning combination is won regardless of the operation procedure, the main control unit 41 determines the operation procedure and issues a command for specifying information for specifying the operation procedure. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 is elected to the predetermined role until the RT2 signal is output once (that is, until the operation procedure is correctly answered a predetermined number of times) after being controlled by a series of ATs. When the main control unit 41 determines that the operation procedure in the predetermined combination winning game matches the operation procedure determined continuously a predetermined number of times, RT2 is executed. The sub-control unit 91 outputs the RT2 signal once after being controlled by a series of ATs (that is, the operation procedure is repeated a predetermined number of times in succession). After that, a navigation effect is executed so that the operation procedure does not coincide with the operation procedure determined on the main control unit 41 side for a predetermined number of times when the predetermined combination is won, and the RT2 signal is further transmitted from the main control unit 41. May not be output. When configured in this way, the RT2 signal is not output when normal / RT2 is completed. More specific description will be given below.

  When the main control unit 41 wins the normal replay that can be won regardless of the operation procedure in the normal / RT2, the main control unit 41 determines whether to select the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel as the first stop. The information for specifying the reel is included in the internal winning command for specifying the normal replay winning, and is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes a special navigation effect that suggests a reel specified from the internal winning command when it is determined that the normal replay winning is performed in the normal / RT2 during a series of ATs, and in the normal replay winning game When the operating procedure is the determined operating procedure, the correct answer counter is incremented by 1. When the operating procedure in the normal replay winning game is not the determined operating procedure, the correct answer counter is reset, and the correct counter value is a predetermined value ( For example, the RT2 signal output completion flag is set when 3) is reached (that is, when the correct answer is continuously made a predetermined number of times in the normal replay winning game).

  In the main control unit 41, in the normal / RT2, when the operation procedure in the normal replay winning game is the determined operation procedure, the main side correct counter is incremented by 1, and the operation procedure in the normal replay winning game is determined. When it is not a procedure, the main side correct answer counter is reset, and the RT2 signal is output when the value of the main side correct answer counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3) (that is, when the correct answer is continuously repeated a predetermined number of times in the normal replay winning game). To do.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 sets the correct counter value to a predetermined value when the RT2 signal output flag is already set in the normal / RT2 in the series of ATs and the normal replay is selected. When the value is smaller by 1 (for example, 2), the main control unit 41 does not output the RT2 signal by executing a special navigation effect suggesting a reel different from the reel specified by the internal winning command.

  By configuring as described above, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether to notify the operation procedure determined by the main control unit 41 according to whether the RT2 signal needs to be output to the outside, Since the main control unit 41 outputs the RT2 signal to the outside based on the number of consecutive correct answer operations, it can output information indicating the accurate control state of the sub-control unit 91 to the outside. Therefore, since the main control unit 41 can also output the control state of the sub-control unit 91 to the outside, even if it is the control state of the sub-control unit 91 without complicating the signal path for external output, It can be accurately transmitted outside the slot machine.

  When a series of ATs is an AT of 50 games corresponding to Navistock 1, an RT2 signal can be output once corresponding to Navistock 1, and as a result, Navistock 1 can be output from an external device. It is possible to accurately recognize the number of times controlled by the AT corresponding to.

  As described above, the normal replay is a winning combination for deriving the same symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay regardless of the operation procedure. For this reason, since the same symbol combination can be derived without being influenced by the operation procedure determined as the first stop by the main control unit 41, it is possible to contribute to improvement of interest.

  (3) Since the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment can reach the specific timing for stopping the output of the RT2 signal before 2000 ms elapses after the output of the RT2 signal is started, it is specified in this case. The example in which the output of the RT2 signal is continued until the predetermined timing after the timing is reached has been described.

  However, the specific timing may be set to be a timing that always comes after a predetermined period of time has passed since the output of the RT2 signal was started, regardless of the operation from the player. For example, the output of the RT2 signal may be stopped at the end of the second game after starting the output of the RT2 signal. In this case, for example, when it is not specified that the normal / RT2 is specified, the external device side specifies that when the output of the RT2 signal is stopped, it is controlled to the normal / RT2, and the game is finished this time. The medal specified from the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal in the previous game can be determined as a medal in normal / RT2. In addition, when the output of the RT2 signal is stopped when the normal / RT2 is specified, it is specified that the normal / RT2 has ended, and the medal IN signal and the medal in the ended game and the previous game are specified. The medal specified from the OUT signal can be determined as a medal that is not in normal / RT2. As a result, the RT2 signal can be reliably detected in the external device, and the occurrence of inconvenience that the predetermined period has not yet elapsed when the specific timing is reached after the output of the RT2 signal is started can be prevented. it can.

  In the slot machine 1, at least the time for operating the start switch 7 to start a new game from the start of the output of the RT2 signal until the specific timing is reached, the reels 2L to 2L It takes time from the start of rotation of 2R until the reels 2L to 2R reach a constant speed and time to operate all the stop switches 8L to 8R. For this reason, in the slot machine 1, it is difficult for a situation in which the specific timing is reached before 2000 ms elapses after the output of the RT2 signal is started. In addition, the time required to reliably detect the RT2 signal in the external device can be made shorter than the shortest time required to complete one game in the slot machine 1, and in such a case, There is no situation where a specific timing for stopping the output of the RT2 signal is reached before 2000 ms elapses after the output of the RT2 signal is started. Therefore, the process of measuring the output time of the RT2 signal and the process of delaying the timing for terminating the output of the RT2 signal according to the output time of the RT2 signal may not be performed. Specifically, the process of Sk104, Sk106, Sk108, Sk110, Sk111 to Sk113 in FIG. 23 is not performed, and the process proceeds from Sk103 to Sk114. If YES in Sk105, the process proceeds to Sk107, and if YES in Sk107. May be transferred to Sk109, and if NO in Sk107, the process may be transferred to Sk114. Thereby, the processing burden required for outputting the RT2 signal can be reduced.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal are exemplified as the game related signals output to the outside, but the game related signals are not limited thereto. If the game-related signal is a signal output in accordance with the progress of the game, for example, a game start signal indicating the start of the game, a reel stop signal indicating the stop of the reel, a medal insertion signal indicating that a medal has been inserted, It may be a settlement signal indicating that a credit or a set number of bets has been settled. The output of the RT2 signal as the specific gaming state signal may be configured to end at a timing not included in the period during which these game-related signals can be output.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the variable display device having the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided. When all the reels are stopped, one game is finished, and the display result combinations derived to the three reels are combined. The slot machine where a prize is generated according to the above is explained. That is, a variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable can be used for one game using game value. On the other hand, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets, and the display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. The slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived and displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas has been described. However, when a display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, one game is completed, and a prize is awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display device. As long as the slot machine can be generated, the slot machine is not limited to one having a variable display device having three reels, but has a single reel or a variable display device having a plurality of reels other than three. It may be.

  (6) A gaming device which is an external device such as the calling lamp device 200 in the embodiment described above is provided corresponding to the slot machine 1 and other types of slot machines in the embodiment. Further, in the case of corresponding to the slot machine 1 in the embodiment, when the reception of the RT2 signal from the slot machine 1 is completed, the betting number during the ART period is traced back by the number of games corresponding to the reception completion timing. It is necessary to identify and count the number of payouts. For this reason, the gaming apparatus such as the calling lamp apparatus 200 may include a setting means for setting the number of games (for example, the previous game, the previous game, etc.) going back from the completion of the RT2 signal reception. . Further, the setting means may set the number of games going back according to the RT2 signal reception timing (when the game is finished or when the medal IN signal is received). As a result, the information in the ART can be accurately totaled so as to correspond to a plurality of types of slot machines including the slot machine 1 in the embodiment and other types of slot machines.

  (7) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 41 main control unit, 91 sub control unit, 140 hall computer, 142 CPU, 143 RAM, 145 storage device 146 input device, 147 display device, 149 communication unit, 200 call lamp device, 200 'call lamp device, 209 display unit, 257 reception window, 260 display substrate, 261 display screen, 264 display substrate, 265 reception unit, 267 light bulb 268 lighting control circuit, 269 communication unit, 270 control board, 277 dip switch, 278a-g signal input unit, 278L signal input / output unit, 278R signal input / output unit, 279 control microcomputer, 280 base, 300 control Knit, 569 communication unit, 575 RAM, 576 EEPROM, 579 control microcomputer, 581 1st port, 582 2nd port, 583 3rd port, 584 4th port, 581a-g signal input unit, 582a-g signal input unit, 583a-g signal input unit, 584a-g signal input unit, 1000 external output board.

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
Game progress control means for performing control to advance the game when a progress operation is performed in a state in which the game can proceed;
Game state control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of game states in accordance with the result of the game;
External output control means for performing control to externally output signals related to the game ;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the derivation of the display result with the addition of game value ,
The external output control means includes
A specific gaming state signal output means for outputting a specific gaming state signal corresponding to the specific gaming state on the condition of control of the specific gaming state among the plurality of gaming states;
Game-related signal output means for outputting a game-related signal when the giving display result is derived ,
The specific gaming state signal output means is controlled to the specific gaming state and starts outputting the specific gaming state signal . When the given display result is not derived in a predetermined game started thereafter, the specific gaming state signal is output. The output of the specific gaming state signal is continued until the output of the game-related signal is completed when the giving display result is derived in the predetermined game, and the process ends . Slot machine.

Images